LEWIS COUNTY LEWIS COUNTY – JEFFERSON COMMUNITY COLLEGE EDUCATION CENTER PROJECT
CONTRACT 2A: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 2B: ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 2C: MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 2D: PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 ...... Summary 012200 ...... Unit Prices 012600 ...... Contract Modification Procedures 012900 ...... Payment Procedures 013100 ...... Project Management and Coordination 013200 ...... Construction Progress Documentation 013300 ...... Submittal Procedures 014000 ...... Quality Requirements 014200 ...... References 015000 ...... Temporary Facilities and Controls 016000 ...... Product Requirements 017300 ...... Execution 017700 ...... Closeout Procedures 017839 ...... Project Record Documents
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
033000 ...... Cast-In-Place Concrete
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
042200 ...... Concrete Unit Masonry
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 of 5 047000 ...... Manufactured Masonry 047200 ...... Cast Stone Masonry
DIVISION 05 – METALS
051200 ...... Structural Steel 054000 ...... Cold-Formed Metal Framing 055813 ...... Column Covers
DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
061053 ...... Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 061600 ...... Sheathing 064116 ...... Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
072100 ...... Thermal Insulation 072500 ...... Weather Barriers 074113.16 ...... Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels 074213.13 ...... Formed Metal Wall Panels 076200 ...... Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim 077523 ...... Snow Guards 079200 ...... Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
081113 ...... Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 081416 ...... Flush Wood Doors 083113 ...... Access Doors & Frames 083323 ...... Overhead Coiling Doors 084113 ...... Aluminum-Framed Entrances & Storefronts 085200 ...... Wood Windows 087100 ...... Door Hardware 088000 ...... Glazing
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
092216 ...... Non-Structural Metal Framing 092900 ...... Gypsum Board 093013 ...... Ceramic Tiling 095123 ...... Acoustical Tile Ceilings 095200 ...... Acoustical Metal Ceilings 096229 ...... Cork Wall Tile 096513 ...... Resilient Base & Accessories 096519 ...... Resilient Tile Flooring 096813 ...... Tile Carpeting 099113 ...... Exterior Painting TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 of 5 099123 ...... Exterior Painting 099600 ...... High Performance Coatings
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
101100 ...... Visual Display Units 101432 ...... Panel Signage 102113.19 ...... Plastic Toilet Compartments 102239 ...... Folding Panel Partitions 102600 ...... Wall and Door Protection 102800 ...... Toilet, Bath & Laundry Accessories 104413 ...... Fire Protection Cabinets 104416 ...... Fire Extinguishers 107113 ...... Exterior Sun Control Devices
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
122413 ...... Roller Window Shades 123661 ...... Simulated Stone Countertops 124813 ...... Entrance Floor Mats & Frames
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)
DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION
111313 ...... Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
220529 ...... Supports & Anchors 220553 ...... Piping Identification 220700 ...... Plumbing Insulation 223000 ...... Plumbing – General 224000 ...... Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL (NOT USED)
DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION (NOT USED)
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
260501 ...... Common Work Results for Electrical 260519 ...... Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 of 5 260526 ...... Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260529 ...... Hangars & Supports for Electrical Systems 260533 ...... Raceways & Boxes for Electrical Systems 260553 ...... Identification for Electrical Systems 260923 ...... Lighting Control Devices 260943 ...... Distributed Digital Lighting Control System 262213 ...... Low-Voltage Distribution Transformers 262416 ...... Panelboards 262726 ...... Wiring Devices 262813 ...... Fuses 262816 ...... Enclosed Switches 264313 ...... Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Curcuits 265119 ...... LED Interior Lighting 265213 ...... Emergency & Exit Lighting 265619 ...... LED Exterior Lighting
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATION
270500 ...... Common Work Results 270528 ...... Communications Pathway Systems 271100 ...... Telecommunications Room Fittings 271300 ...... Backbone Cabling 271500 ...... Horizontal Cabling 271700 ...... Testing & Identification
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
281300 ...... Access Controls 282300 ...... Video Surveillance 283111 ...... Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 of 5 DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
310100 ...... Maintenance of Earthwork 310513 ...... Soils for Earthwork 310516 ...... Aggregate for Earthwork 310519 ...... Geosynthetics for Earthwork 311000 ...... Site Clearing 312000 ...... Earth Moving 312319 ...... Dewatering 312500 ...... Soil Erosion & Sedimentation Control 315000 ...... Excavation Support and Protection 317001 ...... Cased Highway and Utility Crossings
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321200 ...... Flexible Paving 321273 ...... Pavement Joint Sealants 321313 ...... Concrete Paving 321723 ...... Pavement Markings 329113 ...... Planting Soils 329300 ...... Plants
DIVISION 33 – UTILITES
330500 ...... Common Work Results for Utilities 330526 ...... Utility Identification 331116 ...... Water Utility Piping 331300 ...... Clean and Disinfect 333313 ...... Sanitary Sewer Piping 334100 ...... Storm Drainage Piping 334413 ...... Precast Concrete Manholes and Catch Basins
DIVISION 34 – TRANSPORTATION
340133 ...... Maintenance and Protection of Traffic 344113 ...... Traffic Signs
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 of 5
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work under separate contracts. 4. Access to site. 5. Coordination with occupants. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification and drawing conventions. 8. Miscellaneous provisions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 015000 “Temporary Facilities and Controls”.
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: JCC-Lewis County Education Center – Contract #2A, General Construction; Contract #2B, Electrical construction; Contract #2C – Mechanical Construction; Contract #2D – Plumbing Construction.
1. Project Location: 7395 East Road, Lowville, NY 13367 in Lewis County, NY
B. Owner: Lewis County
1. Owner's Representative: Frank Pace, Director of Planning a. Email: [email protected] b. Office: (315) 376-5422 c. Cell: (315) 755-8783
C. Engineer: C&S Engineers, Inc., 499 Col. Eileen Collins Blvd., Syracuse, NY 13212
1. Project Manager: Chuck Brooks a. Email: [email protected] b. Office: 315-455-2000 c. Cell: 315-729-4383
SUMMARY 011000 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings and as indicated by requirements of this Section.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine construction operations to the immediate areas around the building and the proposed site and utility work.
C. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. This Work generally includes general, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing construction to build a new education center, maintenance garage, and associated electrical service as shown in the contract documents. The site work, underground utility placement (except electrical wiring), and structural framing of the two buildings is being performed under a different contract.
D. The Work of Project will be performed under the following Contracts as subsequently described: 1. Contract 2A – General Construction 2. Contract 2B – Electrical Construction 3. Contract 2C – Mechanical Construction 4. Contract 2D – Plumbing Construction
E. The complete scope of Work included in each Contract is as indicated in the entire Contract Documents and is not restricted to work shown on specific drawings or individual specifications sections, nor to the Work of any particular trade or group of trades. Contract titles and numbering systems are logical sequences only and are not intended to denote exclusive work by one Contract; several drawings and Specification Sections indicate work which is part of several Contracts and all Contractors shall review all Contract Drawings and Specifications prior to bidding any Contract.
F. The Specifications are arranged in several Sections for convenience of reference. As with the Drawings, such arrangement shall not be construed as prescribing by Engineer the limits of the Work of subcontractors, nor the class of labor or trade necessary for the accomplishment of the Work.
G. Contract 2A – General Construction
1. Contract 2A includes all work not specifically assigned to any other Contract and generally consists of furnishing and installing the following:
a. Education center building including metal stud framing, wood, and plastic work; thermal and moisture protection, doors and windows (including roll up door frames), and finishes for the constructed buildings. Additionally, this contract will include the concrete and steel construction of the frame for an outdoor HVAC unit as shown in the contract documents. Excluded from this contract is the concrete, masonry, steel, and wood construction associated with the structural elements of both buildings.
SUMMARY 011000 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
H. Contract 2B – Electrical Construction
1. Contract 2B generally consists of furnishing and installing the following:
a. Permeant electric service. Site work (including underground conduit and transformer pad completed under a different contract). b. Power distribution panels and equipment. c. Electric power and control wiring for building systems. d. Electric power and control wiring for all process equipment, instrumentation, HVAC equipment and accessories. Terminate wiring for all equipment provided by Contract 1C in accordance with approved shop drawings for such equipment. e. Light fixtures and associated wiring. Exterior light poles procured under a separate contract but will be installed under this contract. f. Fire alarm. g. Security. h. Data.
I. Contract 2C – Mechanical Construction
1. Contract 2C generally consists of furnishing and installing the following with associated controls:
a. Commercial kitchen hood b. Roof vent c. Register d. Air conditioning unit e. Wall heater f. Fans g. Air cooled condensing unit h. Duct work
J. Contract 2D – Plumbing Construction
1. Contract 2D generally consists of furnishing and installing the following:
a. Floor drain and drain piping b. Water heater c. Water closet, lavatory, kitchen sink, mop basin sink and associated piping. d. Water service and distribution piping within the building footprint from the building stub ups.
1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS
A. The Owner has previously awarded a contract to complete the site work, site utility installation (other than electrical wiring), and the structural construction of both buildings. Contract #1 drawings have been included for reference only as an appendix to the drawing package. It is
SUMMARY 011000 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
anticipated that this contract will be performed concurrently with the contracts in this package on the same Project Site.
B. The Contactor shall cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
1.6 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine construction operations to project area. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work on the project site to normal business working hours of 7 a.m. to 5 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or adjacent properties unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Engineer's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to adjacent properties with Engineer.
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Engineer's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.
SUMMARY 011000 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY 011000 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012600 “Contract Modification Procedures”. 2. Section 013300 “Submittal Procedures”. 3. Section 310513 “Soils For Earthwork”. 4. Section 312000 “Earth Moving”.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
B. A contingency unit price item shall only be incorporated when determined necessary, and as approved by the Owner and Engineer.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, quality assurance testing, insurance, overhead, and profit.
B. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
C. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
UNIT PRICES 012200 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES
A. Contingency Unit Price Item 312200.01: Imported Granular Material.
1. Description: Obtain and deliver imported granular material from an approved off site borrow source, according to Sections 310513 "Soils for Earthwork" and 312000 "Earth Moving." This item does not include placement or compaction of the soil material. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of material delivered, based on transported weight and material unit density. 3. The cost of placement and compaction shall be included in the contract total lump sum price.
END OF SECTION 012200
UNIT PRICES 012200 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Engineer will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on form included in Project Manual.
1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Engineer will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Engineer are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use forms provided by Engineer. Sample copies are included in Project Manual.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Engineer.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Proposal Request Form: Use form provided by Owner. Sample copy is included in Project Manual.
1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS
A. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 (Unit Prices) for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work.
1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Engineer will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form included in Project Manual.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Engineer may issue a Construction Change Directive on form included in Project Manual. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012200 "Unit Prices". 2. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures". 3. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submit the schedule of values to Engineer at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents and the contract drawings as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location. b. Name of Engineer. c. Engineer's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.
3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Drawing Number. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one- hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.
7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Engineer and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Engineer by the last day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.
1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Engineer.
D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Engineer will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on- site and items stored off-site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Engineer by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.
H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference.
I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Engineer issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination procedures. 2. Requests for Information (RFIs). 3. Project meetings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation". 2. Section 017300 "Execution". 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request For Information – a written request from Owner, Engineer, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 5 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project Web site, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Engineer will return RFIs submitted to Engineer by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Engineer. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: In a form suitable to Owner and Engineer.
1. Attachments to electronic RFI’s shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
D. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Engineer's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Engineer after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Engineer's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Engineer's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Engineer's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 (Contract Modification Procedures).
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Engineer in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
E. On receipt of Engineer's action, immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Engineer within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Engineer will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.
1. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Engineer will distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, within three days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Engineer will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Engineer, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Engineer, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. l. Preparation of record documents. m. Use of the premises and existing buildings. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. s. Construction waste management and recycling. t. Parking availability. u. Office, work, and storage areas. v. Equipment deliveries and priorities. w. Safety. x. Security. y. Progress cleaning.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Project Closeout Conference: Engineer will schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Engineer, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Engineer, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:
a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples and spare parts. f. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. h. Submittal procedures. i. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. j. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.
3. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
D. Progress Meetings: Engineer will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Engineer, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
4. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Site condition reports. 5. Special reports.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures". 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.
G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file.
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.
1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.
C. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
E. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
F. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 (Project Management and Coordination). Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, and interim milestones. 2. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 3. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 4. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 5. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 6. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
7. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 8. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 9. Review procedures for updating schedule.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of final completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Engineer. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 (Submittal Procedures) in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Engineer's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 (Summary). Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Use of premises restrictions. b. Provisions for future construction. c. Seasonal variations. d. Environmental control.
5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Fabrication. e. Deliveries. f. Installation. g. Tests and inspections.
6. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Site grading by Phase location. b. Completion of stormwater management facilities. c. Completion of landscaping. d. Substantial Completion.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.
1. See Section 012900 (Payment Procedures) for cost reporting and payment procedures.
F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours,
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.
H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 10 days of date established for the Notice of Award.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.
1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
2.3 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 13. Change Orders received and implemented. 14. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 15. Services connected and disconnected. 16. Independent tests and inspections. 17. Partial completions and occupancies. 18. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Engineer, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures". 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation". 3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Engineer's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Engineer's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."
C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed- layout document format.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Engineer and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Initial Submittal: Submit within 5 days of date established for the Notice of Award. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Engineer's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication.
1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Engineer's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Engineer for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Engineer's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 312000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 312000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Engineer. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form provided by Engineer, containing the following information:
a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Engineer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:
a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.
E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Engineer.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Engineer on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.
G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action stamp.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. Engineer will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.
2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Engineer will return submittal with options selected.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 (Construction Progress Documentation).
G. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 (Payment Procedures).
H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 (Quality Requirements).
I. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 (Closeout Procedures).
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of Engineers and owners, and other information specified.
K. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
L. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
M. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
N. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
O. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
P. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
Q. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.
R. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
S. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
T. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
U. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Engineer.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 (Closeout Procedures).
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ENGINEER'S ACTION
A. Action Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Informational Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Engineer will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Engineer.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Engineer without action.
END OF SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Engineer, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Engineer.
C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.
D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.
F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Quality-assurance tests and inspections are Contractor's responsibility. Perform quality-assurance activities required by individual Specification Sections to verify that the Work complies with Project requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
E. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
F. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
G. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.
H. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
I. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
J. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
1.8 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality-control tests and inspections are Contractor's responsibility. Perform quality-control activities required by individual Specification Sections to verify that the Work complies with Project requirements.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services. 3. Perform additional quality-control activities as required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
C. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in pre-installation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-assurance and -control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Engineer. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Engineer's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Engineer's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Engineer. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
REFERENCES 014200 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org. 8. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org. 9. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 10. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 11. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 12. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 13. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 14. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. 15. AIA - American Institute of Engineers (The); www.aia.org. 16. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 17. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 18. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org. 19. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 20. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 21. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com. 22. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 23. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 24. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 25. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 26. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.
REFERENCES 014200 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
28. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 29. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). 30. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 31. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org. 32. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org. 33. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org. 34. ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials International); www.astm.org. 35. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 36. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 37. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 38. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 39. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood-Preservers' Association); www.awpa.com. 40. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 41. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 42. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 43. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 44. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 45. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.com. 46. BOCA - BOCA; (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.); (See ICC). 47. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 48. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org. 49. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 50. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 51. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 52. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 53. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 54. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 55. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 56. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com. 57. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 58. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 59. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca. 60. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa- international.org. 61. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org. 62. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 63. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org. 64. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 65. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 66. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 67. ECA - Electronic Components Association; www.ec-central.org. 68. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECA). 69. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).
REFERENCES 014200 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
70. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 71. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 72. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 73. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. 74. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com. 75. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 76. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 77. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 78. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 79. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com. 80. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 81. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 82. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 83. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 84. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org. 85. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com. 86. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 87. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA). 88. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 89. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 90. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 91. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org. 92. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 93. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. 94. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 95. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America); www.ies.org. 96. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 97. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. 98. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org. 99. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 100. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 101. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com. 102. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society); www.isa.org. 103. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA). 104. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org. 105. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 106. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). 107. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home. 108. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. 109. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 110. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 111. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 112. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 113. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org. 114. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org. 115. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.
REFERENCES 014200 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
116. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association); www.wmmpa.com. 117. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 118. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-hq.org. 119. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 120. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); www.nace.org. 121. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 122. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org. 123. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 124. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 125. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 126. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 127. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 128. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 129. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 130. NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org. 131. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA). 132. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 133. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 134. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 135. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 136. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 137. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 138. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 139. NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International); www.nsf.org. 140. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 141. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 142. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 143. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 144. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 145. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 146. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 147. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 148. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 149. SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org. 150. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 151. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 152. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 153. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com. 154. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE). 155. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 156. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 157. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 158. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 159. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 160. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 161. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.
REFERENCES 014200 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
162. SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 163. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 164. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 165. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 166. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 167. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 168. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 169. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America); www.tileusa.com. 170. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. 171. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association; (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association / Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org. 172. TIA/EIA - See TIA. 173. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 174. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 175. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 176. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 177. UBC - Uniform Building Code; (See ICC). 178. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. 179. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org. 180. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 181. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org. 182. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 183. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 184. WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California); www.wicnet.org. 185. WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA). 186. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 187. WPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 3. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 4. DOD - Department of Defense; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil. 5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.
REFERENCES 014200 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov. 9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division; http://eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; www.trb.org. 15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov. 18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; www.usp.org. 19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.
E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil. 3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.
6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 014200
REFERENCES 014200 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 015000 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and protection measures.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary".
1.3 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. General Requirements: Overall responsibility, code compliance, permits for temporary work, and responsibility for additional temporary work.
B. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water and sanitary facilities.
C. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, fencing, protection of installed work, water control, noise control, dust control, maintenance of traffic and security.
D. Construction Facilities: Access roads and parking, temporary buildings, project signage and cleaning during construction.
1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide, maintain and remove all temporary utilities, temporary controls and construction facilities included in this Section unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. All work of this Section shall be in compliance with the National Electrical Code, Federal, State and local codes and regulations, and any utility company requirements.
C. Obtain all permits required for providing temporary utilities, temporary controls and construction facilities.
D. Where installation requirements for particular materials or equipment (as identified in the individual technical specifications and/or manufacturer's installation recommendations) exceed
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
the general requirements specified in this section, provide the additional temporary utilities, controls and/or facilities as required for those individual construction operations.
1.5 RESPONSIBILITY
A. Temporary Utilities: Provide, maintain and remove all temporary utilities as required to perform the Work.
B. Temporary Controls:
1. Provide, maintain and remove all specific items of temporary control identified in this Section and as indicated on the Contract Drawings, unless noted otherwise.
2. In addition to the specific items of temporary control identified in this Section, provide, maintain and remove additional temporary controls as required to perform the Work, and for protection of work installed.
C. Construction Facilities:
1. Provide, maintain and remove all specific construction facilities identified in this Section and as indicated on the Contract Drawings, unless noted otherwise.
2. Provide field offices, storage facilities and any other construction facilities not herein identified, as required for Contractor’s operations.
1.6 USAGE CHARGES
A. Installation and removal of, and use charges for, temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Engineer, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Provide a scaled site layout drawing showing the proposed use of the site during construction and the space available for the use of other contractors and employee parking. Submittal shall be made prior to the preconstruction conference so that site allocation can be discussed at that conference. Revised site plan showing site allocation, as agreed-upon in the preconstruction conference, shall be prepared and submitted within one week after the conference.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials for temporary utilities, controls and construction facilities may be new or used provided they are adequate in capacity for the required usage. Materials must not create unsafe conditions or violate the requirements of applicable codes and regulations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Electric Power Service: Provide and maintain temporary electric power and lighting as necessary to perform the Work. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Heat, Ventilation: Provide as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations, to protect materials from damage due to temperature, humidity or fumes.
C. Telephone Service: Contractor shall determine level of service required for Contractor's use.
D. Water Service: Provide all water required to perform the Work.
E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
3.2 USE OF PERMANENT SYSTEMS
A. Permanent systems may not be used for construction operations except where specifically noted otherwise.
3.3 BARRIERS
A. Provide as required to prevent public entry to construction areas, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.
B. Provide barriers around trees and plants designated to remain. Protect against vehicular traffic, stored materials, dumping, chemically injurious materials, and puddling or continuous running water.
3.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect all installed work from damage during construction activities. Provide special protection if specified in individual Specification Sections.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate area to minimize damage.
3.5 WATER CONTROL
A. Grade site to drain. Provide and operate pumping equipment to maintain excavations free of water.
B. Prevent the introduction of sediment into existing sewers or surface water by the use of sediment basins or filters. Existing sewers or surface waters are to be cleaned if they become contaminated.
C. Mechanically retard and control the rate of runoff from the construction site. This includes the construction of diversion ditches, benches, berms and the use of silt fences and strawbales and other appropriate measures to retard and divert runoff to protected drainage courses.
D. Trap sediment in sediment basins designed for that purpose. Remove accumulated sediment to maintain basins in functioning condition.
3.6 NOISE AND DUST CONTROL
A. Dust Control:
1. Keep dust down at all times, including during nonworking periods.
2. Control dust from site soils, haul roads, and other areas disturbed by operations by sprinkling with water or treating with dust suppressants.
B. Noise Control: Make maximum use of low-noise emission products, as certified by the EPA.
3.7 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
A. Maintain traffic on streets and roadways at all times unless specified or written permission is obtained.
B. Maintain driveways to all fire departments, industrial establishments, businesses and residential structures.
C. Coordinate the work with all interested parties to produce minimum disruption of traffic, parking and access.
3.8 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off-site.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.9 PROJECT SIGNS
A. Provide project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
B. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as required to identify entrance to Project.
3.10 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A. Provide field offices and storage facilities on site as required to perform the Work.
B. Coordinate the location of these facilities with the Engineer and other Contractors to preclude interference with construction operations.
C. Relocate facilities as required by construction operations.
3.11 REMOVAL
A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services and construction prior to Substantial Completion inspection.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Remove underground installations to full depth; grade site as indicated. Restore existing facilities used during construction to a specified or to original condition.
END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 014200 "References".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Engineer will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 (Submittal Procedures). b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 (Submittal Procedures). Show compliance with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 3. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 )Closeout Procedures).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Engineer will make selection. 4. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Engineer's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Engineer's sample. Engineer's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Engineer will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of Engineers and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Protection of installed construction.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary". 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures". 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and
EXECUTION 017300 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Engineer according to requirements in Section 013100 (Project Management and Coordination).
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Engineer promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
EXECUTION 017300 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Engineer when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Engineer.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Engineer. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Engineer before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
EXECUTION 017300 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. Dispose of materials lawfully.
B. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.
C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for maintenance and protection.
END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION 017300 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution". 2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents".
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including spare parts and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Engineer. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 5. Submit test records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 3. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 4. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with construction tools, equipment and similar elements. 5. Complete final cleaning requirements.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection. On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Engineer, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 (Payment Procedures). 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Engineer's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Engineer. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. List all incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Include the following information at the top of each page of the list: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Engineer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 2. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. Engineer will return annotated file.
1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project. 1. Clean Project site, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. 2. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. 3. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
END OF SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Standard General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Product Data. 3. Miscellaneous record submittals.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution". 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Maintain and submit record documents in accordance with General Condition 6.12. 2. The Contractor shall obtain, at his own expense, two sets of full-size Contract Drawings for this purpose prior to the commencement of Work. 3. Maintain accurate records of all authorized changes to the Contract Documents and deviations in the Work as it is actually installed. 4. Submit one current copy of record documents prior to Substantial Completion and a separate final copy upon final completion, as required by General Condition 6.12. If Owner partially utilizes any portion of the project, Contractor shall submit a current copy of record documents for that portion being utilized, in accordance with General Condition 6.12.B, prior to Owner's acceptance of that portion as substantially complete.
B. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record- keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Locations and depths of underground utilities. d. Revisions to routing of piping. e. Actual equipment or structure locations. f. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. g. Changes made following Engineer's written orders. h. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. i. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. j. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Electronic File: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Engineer. e. Name of Contractor.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.2 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.
1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.
1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 017839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, and placement procedures for the following types of concrete mixes:
1. Foundations (Bases at Fences, Light Poles, Bollards). 2. Sidewalks and exterior slabs on grade (including dumpster and generator pad) 3. Grade adjustment of drainage and utility structures (if required). 4. Thrust blocks for underground watermains. 5. Concrete curb (integral with sidewalk).
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section “Aggregates for Earthwork” for aggregate subbase course. 2. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for subgrade preparation
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
C. Shop Drawings: For steel reinforcement and formwork.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products, that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment, and has a minimum three years experience.
1. Concrete batching plants shall be currently approved as concrete suppliers by the New York State Department of Transportation (NYSDOT).
2. Truck mixers for concrete shall be currently approved by the New York State Department of Transportation (NYSDOT).
4. Fly Ash supplier shall be on the New York State Department of Transportation’s current “Approved List of Suppliers of Fly Ash”.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
5. Source Quality Control: The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to inspect and approve the following items, at his own discretion, either with his own forces or with a designated inspection agency.
6. Notify the Owner's Representative and the testing agency at least 24 hours prior to placing any concrete.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Perform work in accordance with: 1. New York State Department of Transportation (NYSDOT) 2008 Standard Specifications: a. Section 501: Portland Cement Concrete – General. b. Section 608: Sidewalks, Driveways, and Bicycle Paths. 2. ACI Publications: a. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.” b. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." c. ACI 304 - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 3. ASTM International: a. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. b. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. c. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. d. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. e. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. f. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. g. ASTM C1315 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. h. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
D. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.
E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.3 SYNTHETIC FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Synthetic Fibers for Secondary Reinforcement: Synthetic, polypropylene fibrillated fibers, specifically engineered and manufactured for use as a secondary concrete reinforcement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III. Use Forta® Super-Net fibers, (or approved equal, as appearing on the NYS DOT Approved List for Concrete Fiber Reinforcement). Fiber lengths are ¾ inch long, collated fibrillated fiber, dosed into the concrete mix at 1.5 lb/CY.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:
1. ASTM C 150, Type I or II Portland Cement. 2. Use approved brands without change for the entire project. 3. Cement used throughout the project shall be uniform in color so as not to prejudice the appearance of exposed concrete.
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F, as per NYSDOT 2008 Standard Specifications Section 711-10 (Fly Ash).
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: As per NYSDOT 2008 Standard Specifications Section 703-01 (Fine Aggregates) and 703-02 (Course Aggregate). Provide Aggregates from an approved NYSDOT source.
1. Fine Aggregate: a. Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. b. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, organic impurities or foreign materials meeting the requirements of ASTM C33. 2. Coarse Aggregate: Crushed gravel or crushed stone meeting the requirements of ASTM C33. Aggregate size is dependent on mix type.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Water: As per NYSDOT 2008 Standard Specifications Section 712-01 (Water) and ASTM C 94/C 94M, Potable. Approval of Owner's Representative is required for any water source other than a public potable water supply.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: As per NYSDOT 2008 Standard Specifications Section 711-08 (Admixtures) and ASTM C 260.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Anti-Spalling, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. Approved products and Manufactures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborn, A Division of BASF. 2. SealCure Emulsion by Conspec, A Dayton Superior Company. 3. Cure & Seal by Symons Corp. 4. Or Approved Equal.
F. Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B, manufactured for colored concrete.
1. For integrally colored concrete, curing compound shall be pigmented type approved by coloring admixture manufacturer. 2. For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with sealer.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
G. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, waterborne, non-yellowing and UV-resistant, membrane-forming, medium-gloss, acrylic copolymer emulsion solution, manufactured for colored concrete, containing not less than 15 percent solids by volume
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion Joint Strips: As per NYSDOT 2008 Standard Specifications Section 705-07 (Premoulded Resilient Joint Filler) and ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. 1. Use a material/manufacturer from the NYSDOT Approved List.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.
C. All concrete exposed to the weather or water, or subject to freezing shall be air-entrained.
D. Cast-in-place concrete shall be normal weight concrete and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi except as otherwise specified on the drawing notes. See table for location and concrete specifications.
F'c (Min. Cement Water ASTM 28-Day Unit Range ** Cement Air Entr. C33 Location Comp. Weight Slump Ratio (percent) Aggregate Strength) (lbs/cy) (Inches) (by *** (Size No.) (psi) min. Weight) General Foundation (in- cludes structure adjustments, foundations for 4,000 611 67 or 57 2”- 4” 0.46 4-8 Bollards, Hand- rail & Fence Posts, & Light Poles Watermain 4,000 611 67 or 57 2”- 4” 0.46 4-8 Thrust Blocks Slabs* on Grade other than inside building line, ex- 4,000* 615 67 or 57 3" 0.45 4-8 terior concrete curb
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
Building Slab, Footing, Base- 4500 611 67 or 57 2”-4” 0.45 4-8 ment Walls
*This mix to have synthetic fiber. Concrete Mix for sidewalk installations shall have synthetic fiber that meets the requirements of Section 2.3A Secondary Fiber Reinforcement.
**Slump, as noted in table, is before the addition of any water-reducing admixtures. When a water- reducing admixture is used, maximum slump shall be 6 inches.
***Use air-entraining admixture, not air-entrained cement.
E. Optional Material: Fly ash may be substituted for (Portland) cement in normal weight and lightweight concrete up to a maximum of 15 percent by weight of the required minimum (Portland) cement. If fly ash is incorporated in a concrete design mix, make necessary adjustments to the design mix to compensate for the use of fly ash as a partial replacement for (Portland) cement.
F. Application rate for Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: The application rate for the corrosion- inhibiting admixture shall be the number of gallons per cubic yard of concrete, per the selected manufacturer's recommendation for all concrete placements where indicated on the drawings.
G. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures in concrete unless specified or approved in writing by the Owner's Representative.
H. Weather Conditions: Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes during mixing, placement and curing. 1. Hot Weather: a. Provide adequate controls to insure that the temperature of the concrete when placed does not exceed 90 degrees F., and make every effort to place it at a lower temperature. The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not be so high as to cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set or cold joints. Ingredients may be cooled before mixing by shading the aggregates, fog spraying the coarse aggregate, chilling the mixing water or other approved means. Mixing water may be chilled with flake ice or well-crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing, providing the water equivalent of the ice is calculated into the total amount of mixing water. b. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90ºF, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. (ACI 305)
2. Cold Weather: a. When air temperature is below 40 degrees F heat the mixing water and, if necessary, the aggregates to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F and not more than 80 degrees F at point of placement. If the mixing water is heated, do not exceed a temperature of 140 degrees F at the time it is added to the cement and aggregates. (ACI 306)
I. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, at no additional cost to the Owner, and as accepted by the Owner's Representative.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Owner's Representative before using in the work.
J. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd.
K. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
B. Place as per the project Plans.
2.9 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Owner’s Representative.
C. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that 1. Compacted subgrade soil is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. 2. Compacted subbase is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. 3. Gradients and elevations of base are correct. 4. Installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed 5. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. 6. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement. 7. Notify Owner’s Representative minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.
B. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.
C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
D. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
E. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
F. Interruption of Concreting: Should placing of concrete be suspended or unavoidably interrupted, keyways and bulkheads shall be provided and steps taken to prevent feather-edging when work is resumed. Horizontal surfaces shall be roughened for bond.
G. Concrete shall be deposited within thirty (30) minutes of completion of mixing. If set retarding admixtures are used, concrete shall be deposited as recommended by the admixture manufacturer. In either case, concrete shall be discharged within 150 minutes of addition of cement to mixer.
H. Retempering concrete, at the project site, by adding water or other means shall not be permitted after the initial specified slump has been obtained and site added admixtures are discharged.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. For Exterior Slabs on Grade, perform work in accordance with Division 32 Section 321623 “Concrete Sidewalks”.
B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film- finish coating system. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 , for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and of levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 24.
3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot- weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Contractor may apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause rapid moisture loss. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
D. Curing Compound: Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Owner’s Representative. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner’s Representative approval.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner’s Representative will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.
B. The following Inspections will be performed:
1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 5. Verification of concrete strength.
C. Concrete Tests (to be performed by the independent testing agency): Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 4 cu. yd. , but less than 20 cu. yd. , plus one set for each additional 40 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi . 8. Test results shall be reported in writing to the Owner’s Representative, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive- strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Owners Representative but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Owner’s Representative. 11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 12. Contractor shall correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. Contractor’s method of correcting any deficiencies in the work shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
END OF SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 042200 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Masonry joint reinforcement. 4. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, locations of special shapes and finishes. 2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, and other special applications.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include data on material properties material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Contractor shall be responsible to protect against all construction generated mortar dust. The contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with cleanup of mortar dust.
B. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place.
B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for movement joints, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
B. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2150 psi. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: 8”x8”x16” Nominal 5. Pattern and texture: Standard pattern, ground-face finish. 6. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 7. All units shall be square, true, and have sharp edges.
C. Integral Water Repellant: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent admixture, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
manufacturer’s mortar additive according to ASTM E514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen.
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIAL
A. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
B. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. c. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
E. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.
F. Water: Potable.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a 5/8- inch cover on outside face.
B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304.
C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Wood Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, stainless-steel wire. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.187-inch- diameter, stainless-steel wire.
D. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:
1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression perpendicular to plane of wall without deforming or developing play in excess of 1/16 inch.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
B. Post installed Anchors: Chemical anchors as indicated.
2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 Specifications. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 2. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S.
C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 3000 psi. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 9 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar before laying fresh masonry.
D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout full height under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise specified.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.6 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than one anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter.
B. Provide not less than 2 inches of airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.
1. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace.
3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in- plane wall or partition movement.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owners representative will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Contractor shall allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site- prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
I. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and at 28 days.
3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 9 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil- contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
3.11 SCAFFOLDING
A. No putlog holes will be permitted for the exterior work.
END OF SECTION 042200
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 047000 - MANUFACTURED MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured Stone Veneer.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated 1. For manufactured masonry, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Samples for Selection: For each color, texture and mortar.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs experienced stonemasons and stone fitters.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of manufactured masonry from single source from single manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery of manufactured masonry to avoid delaying the Work and to minimize the need for on-site storage.
B. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.
1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports. 2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
MANUFACTURED MASONRY 047000 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Manufactured Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone masonry when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining stone masonry face.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter using coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry.
C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.
D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of flashing and similar items to be built into manufactured masonry.
B. Coordinate expansion and control joint locations with substrate material as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
MANUFACTURED MASONRY 047000 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
2.2 STONE VENEER
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dutch Quality Stone, or approved equal by architect.
B. Compressive Strength: ASTM C170: 4,500 psi
C. Shear Bond: ASTM C 482: 190 psi
D. Water Absorption: UBC Standard 15-5: Less than 15 percent
E. Freeze-Thaw Test: ASTM C 666: Less than 3 percent weight loss and no disintegration.
F. Thermal Resistance: ASTM C 177: R-0.5 to R-1
G. Thickness: 1” to 2”
H. Color/Texture: Stack Ledge Series, Autumn Blend color.
2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for cold- weather construction; natural color or white cement may be used as required to produce mortar color indicated.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.
D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in stone masonry mortar.
MANUFACTURED MASONRY 047000 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
G. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement, hydrated lime, and mortar pigments. Mix shall produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
H. Colored Masonry Cement Mix: Packaged blend of masonry cement and mortar pigments. Mix shall produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.
I. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows:
1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. 2. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone. 3. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
J. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.
K. Water: Potable.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd., self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.
B. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations indicated.
2.5 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer.
2.6 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
MANUFACTURED MASONRY 047000 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
4. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches required consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270.
D. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water to a consistency similar to that of thick cream.
1. For latex-modified, portland cement, setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part or all of water, according to latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight. 3. Mix to match Architect's sample.
G. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive manufactured masonry, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone masonry.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean dirty or stained masonry surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean masonry by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.
MANUFACTURED MASONRY 047000 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.3 SETTING OF MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as masonry is set.
1. Use power saws to cut masonry that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. Cut lines straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping. 2. Use hammer and chisel to split masonry that is fabricated with split surfaces. Make edges straight and true, matching similar surfaces that were shop or quarry fabricated. 3. Pitch face at field-split edges as needed to match stones that are not field split.
B. Sort masonry before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use.
C. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance.
D. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more.
B. Variation from Level: For bed joints , and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more.
C. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF MANUFACTURED MASONRY
A. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for installation.
B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible.
C. Install lath over weather-resistant sheathing paper by fastening through sheathing into framing to comply with ASTM C 1063.
3.6 POINTING
A. Prepare masonry-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles. Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch deep until a uniform depth is formed.
B. Point masonry joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers of not more than 3/8 inch deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to it become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.
MANUFACTURED MASONRY 047000 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Tool joints with a smooth jointing tool when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard.
D. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
E. Remove and replace masonry of the following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective joints. 3. Masonry not matching approved samples. 4. Masonry not complying with other requirements indicated.
F. Replace in a manner that results in masonry matching approved samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
G. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
H. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods; Sample cleaning in inconspicuous location. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning masonry. 3. Protect adjacent masonry and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20, Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution. 6. Clean masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. Excess Masonry: Stack excess masonry where directed by Owner for Owner's use.
B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soil- contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in greatest dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least 2 parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
MANUFACTURED MASONRY 047000 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
END OF SECTION 044313.16
MANUFACTURED MASONRY 047000 - 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast stone trim including the following:
a. Wall caps.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. For cast stone units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces.
1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches square in size. 2. For colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
1. Include copies of material test reports for completed projects, indicating compliance of cast stone with ASTM C 1364.
B. Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing according to ASTM C 1364, including test for resistance to freezing and thawing.
CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Provide test reports based on testing within previous two years.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
C. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through single source from single manufacturer.
D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone to avoid delaying the Work and to minimize the need for on- site storage.
B. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.
1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports. 2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but no fewer than seven days after completing cleaning.
CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CAST STONE MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following:
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce cast stone color indicated.
C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors.
D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors.
E. Admixtures: Use only admixtures specified or approved in writing by Architect.
1. Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. 2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement and other admixtures used. 3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 4. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 5. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 6. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
F. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of cast stone material.
1. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M. 2. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M.
2.2 CAST STONE UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Advanced Cast Stone, Inc. 2. Continental Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Melton Classics Incorporated
B. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using the wet-cast method.
CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364.
C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated.
D. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch. 2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch. 3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater.
E. Cure units as follows:
1. Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and temperature of 100 deg F for 12 hours or 70 deg F for 16 hours. 2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following:
a. No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F or above. b. No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F or above. c. No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F or above. d. No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F or above.
F. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.
G. Colors and Textures: Provide fine texture with color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and expressly approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.
CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.4 MORTAR MIXES
A. Do not use admixtures including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water- repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
B. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
1. For setting mortar, use Type N. 2. For pointing mortar, use Type N.
C. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1. Mix to match existing conditions. 2. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample and test cast stone units according to ASTM C 1364.
1. Include one test for resistance to freezing and thawing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR
A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. 2. Coordinate installation of cast stone with installation of flashing.
B. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar.
C. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated.
CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
D. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked.
E. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.
F. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
G. Provide sealant joints as indicated on Drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one- fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch, except where variation is due to warpage of units within tolerances specified.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.
B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.
1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of cast stone.
CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean cast stone by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 047200
CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Structural steel. 2. Field-installed shear connectors. 3. Grout.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel. 2. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as structural steel. 4. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" for surface-preparation and priming requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and their connections.
C. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows:
1. Shapes included in ASTM A 6/A 6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches. 2. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 2 inches. 3. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches.
D. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "Protected Zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are limited.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
E. Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant degradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System and which are indicated as "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data : For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
B. Welding certificates.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
E. Product Test Reports: For the following:
1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout.
F. Source quality-control reports.
G. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE.
C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level.
B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.
C. Construction: Combined system of moment frame and braced frame.
2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products : Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than the following:
1. W-Shapes: 60 percent. 2. Channels, Angles, M , S-Shapes: 60 percent. 3. Plate and Bar: 25 percent. 4. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 25 percent. 5. Steel Pipe: 25 percent. 6. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent.
C. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
D. Channels, Angles, M , S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
E. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
F. Corrosion-Resisting Structural-Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 588/A 588M, Grade 50.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
G. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.
H. Corrosion-Resisting, Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 847/A 847M, structural tubing.
I. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.
1. Weight Class: As indicated. 2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.
J. Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11.
K. Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M.
L. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain finish.
B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish.
1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, compressible-washer type with plain finish.
C. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating. 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with mechanically deposited zinc coating finish.
D. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy- hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon- steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating.
E. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
F. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1. Configuration: Hooked. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
G. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.
1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
H. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
I. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.
J. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.
K. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.
2.4 PRIMER
A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 099123 "Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."
B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.
C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.
D. Primer: SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer.
E. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.
2.5 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.
1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop- priming operations.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill,or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall- opening framing to be attached to structural-steel frame. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. Build up welded framing, weld exposed joints continuously, and grind smooth.
G. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
2.8 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
2.9 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Galvanize lintels shelf angles and welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
C. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.
1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in- place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 9 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.5 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS
A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC 360, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements of testing and inspecting agency that apply to the fire- resistance rating indicated.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:
1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
E. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.
3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.
END OF SECTION 051200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 12 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 2. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing exceeding height limitations of standard, nonstructural metal framing.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for standard, interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing, with height limitations and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.
D. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
E. Evaluation Reports: For nonstandard cold-formed steel framing post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house testing with calibrated test equipment, indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.
C. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
E. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing.
B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following:
a. Interior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa). b. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span for live loads and 1/240 for total loads of the span.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C). 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:
a. Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch (19 mm).
5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.
C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, framing shall comply with AISI S100, AISI S200, and the following: 1. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 2. Headers: AISI S212. 3. Lateral Design: AISI S213.
2.2 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60 (Z180)
B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90 (Z275).
2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) (minimum).
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) (minimum).
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.
D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for one-story structures and 1 inch (25 mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications.
E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) b. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for one-story structures and 1 inch (25 mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications.
2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). b. Flange Width: 2 inch.
F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.
2.4 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-3/8 inches (35 mm) (minimum)
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm)
C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm) 2. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for one-story structures and 1 inch (25 mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications.
E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm). b. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for one-story structures and 1 inch (25 mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications.
2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm). b. Flange Width: 2 inch.
F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.
2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members.
B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole-reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts,carbon-steel nuts, and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
C. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC193, ICC-ES AC58, or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.
1. Uses: Securing cold-formed steel framing to structure. 2. Type: Torque-controlled adhesive anchor or adhesive anchor. 3. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, and with a fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.
D. Shims: Load-bearing, high-density, multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold-formed steel of same grade and metallic coating as framing members supported by shims.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screws penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.
4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire- resistive materials below that required to obtain fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
C. Install load-bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
D. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.
B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.
1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.
F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.
G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.
H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing-assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
I. Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.
3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure.
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.
1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing and infill studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel framing and anchor to building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches (305 mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 9 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Install solid blocking at 96-inch (2440-mm) centers.
G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.
3.5 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure.
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: As indicated on Drawings
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.
1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel metal framing and anchor to building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches (305 mm)] of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.
1. Install solid blocking at 96-inch (2440-mm) centers.
G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Cold-formed steel framing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 054000
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 055813 - COLUMN COVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes snap-together metal column covers.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for column covers.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch- (150- mm-) square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing column covers similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockups of typical column covers. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
COLUMN COVERS 055813 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver column covers wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SNAP-TOGETHER COLUMN COVERS
A. Form column covers to shapes indicated from metal of type and minimum thickness indicated below. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that engages continuous mounting clips.
1. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), with not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32, 0.125 inch thick.
a. Finish: High-performance organic coating.
2. Column covers may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of finishing after fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from view. 3. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide flat surfaces where indicated. 4. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment. 5. Form returns at vertical joints to accommodate backer rod and sealant. 6. Fabricate column covers with 1/2-inch- (12-mm-) wide reveals at horizontal joints produced by forming returns on mating ends of column cover sections. Provide snap-in metal filler strips at reveals matching reveals at vertical joints. Locate horizontal joints as indicated. 7. Fabricate with calk stop/stiffener ring. 8. Apply manufacturer's recommended sound-deadening to backs of column covers.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined.
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting column covers and for attaching them to other work unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sound-Deadening Materials:
1. Insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, and passing ASTM E 136 test. 2. Mastic: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
COLUMN COVERS 055813 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by column cover manufacturer.
2.3 PAINTS AND COATINGS
A. Universal Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of column covers with those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.
B. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends.
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of column covers.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
COLUMN COVERS 055813 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place column covers plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install column covers.
1. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible.
C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.
D. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finish.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 055813
COLUMN COVERS 055813 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 2. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 3. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire- test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire- retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841.
C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Plywood backing panels.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and the following species:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 3. Northern species; NLGA.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content andthe following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.
D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
E. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
H. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
I. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 061053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wall sheathing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. 2. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Wood-preservative-treated plywood.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.
SHEATHING 061600 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.
B. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
2.3 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat all exterior plywood sheathing unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 WALL SHEATHING
A. Plywood Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on the Contract Drawings
SHEATHING 061600 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. For wall sheathing, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
D. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.
D. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.
E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.
F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
SHEATHING 061600 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
END OF SECTION 061600
SHEATHING 061600 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 2. Section 123661 "Simulated Stone Countertops."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in architectural plastic- laminate cabinets.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Plastic laminates for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
2. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas,
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. The Contract Documents may contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. Type of Construction: Frameless.
D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 2 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by Wilsonart, or Architect’s approved equal.
F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: Grade HGS. 4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for doors and fixed panels, horizontally for drawer fronts.
G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. a. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3,
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.
H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.
I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.
1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners.
J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide material as indicated on Contract Drawings.
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 3 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.
D. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated- steel ball-bearing slides. 2. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 2. 3. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1. 4. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD- 100.
E. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
F. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
G. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
H. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
I. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous- metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 4 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.
C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed.
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 5 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 064116
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 6 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 3. Mineral-wool blanket.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation (Rigid Insulation): ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products. 2. Type IV, 25 psi.
2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Owens Corning.
A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft Faced: ASTM C665, Type II (nonreflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).
2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS
A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Gemco; 90-Degree Insulation Hangers.
2. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch-thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with each leg 2 inches square. 3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized- steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150. b. Gemco; R-150.
C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. b. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelope entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction.
D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES
A. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows:
1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. 2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation. 3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. 4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wrap. 2. Flexible flashing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for sheathing joint and penetration treatment.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER
A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The) b. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company) c. Ludlow Coated Products d. Pactiv, Inc e. Raven Industries Inc f. Reemay, Inc
WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 20 perms per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). 3. Air Permeance: Not more than 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. at 0.3-inch wg when tested according to ASTM E 2178. 4. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months.
B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn c. Protecto Wrap Company d. Raven Industries Inc e. Advanced Building Products Inc f. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing g. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp h. Fortifiber Building Systems Group i. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn j. MFM Building Products Corp k. Polyguard Products, Inc l. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc
B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate.
C. Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed.
B. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations.
WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless otherwise indicated.
C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.
END OF SECTION 072500
WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 074113.16 - STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes standing-seam metal roof panels.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.
1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514.
B. Vertical-Rib, Snap-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels shall be full length. Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and snapping panels together.
1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following or equal: a. “LokSeam” as manufacturered by MBCI.
2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
a. Nominal Thickness: 24 gauge. b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
3. Clips: One-piece fixed to accommodate thermal movement.
a. Material: 0.028-inch nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum- zinc alloy-coated steel sheet.
4. Panel Coverage: 18 inches. 5. Panel Height: 1.375 inches.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 30 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
B. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.
B. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fascia, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
C. Panel Fasteners: Screws designed to withstand design loads.
D. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are non-staining, and do not damage panel finish.
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.
D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Panels and Accessories:
1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 2. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated below, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
1. Apply over the entire roof surface.
B. Slip Sheet: Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.
3.2 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory-applied sealant.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 074113.16
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10).
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1. Metal Panels: 12 inches (305 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.
B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
2.2 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Wide-Reveal-Joint, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with vertical panel edges and a stepped profile between panel edges, resulting in a wide reveal joint between panels.
1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
a. Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm). b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. c. Color: To be selected from manufacturer’s full range d. Installed horizontally.
C. Creased-Rib-Profile, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, center- creased, trapezoidal major ribs; with reveal joint between panels. 1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
a. Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm). b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. c. Color: To be selected from manufacturer’s full range d. Installed vertically.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads.
E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.
D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat- lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. Steel Panels and Accessories:
1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed. 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds. 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws. 8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
B. Fasteners:
1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure. 2. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 3. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.
E. Watertight Installation:
1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight. 2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal wall panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 074213.13
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 2. Formed equipment support flashing.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of roof-penetration flashing. 8. Include details of edge conditions.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
9. Include details of special conditions. 10. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 11. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches (1:5).
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface.
1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled).
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.
B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m)minimum.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.
G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. 1. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, concealed backup plate. 2. Fabricate from the Following Materials: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick.
B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick.
C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.
D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
B. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and trim.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant- type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch (400-mm) centers. 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch (600-mm) centers.
C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Secure in waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant unless otherwise indicated.
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Clean off excess sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.
D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
END OF SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 9 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 077253 - SNOW GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Rail-type, seam-mounted snow guards.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for snow guards.
B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans showing layouts and attachment details of snow guards.
1. Include details of rail-type snow guards. 2. Include calculation of number and location of snow guards based on snow load, roof slope, roof type, components, spacings, and finish.
C. Samples: Base, bracket, and 12-inch- (300-mm-) long rail.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each type of snow guard, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Performance Requirements: Provide snow guards that withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
B. Structural Performance:
SNOW GUARDS 077253 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2.2 RAIL-TYPE SNOW GUARDS
A. Seam-Mounted, Rail-Type Snow Guards:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Alpine SnowGuards; a division of Vermont Slate & Copper Services, Inc. b. Metal Roof Innovations, Ltd.; S-5 Attachment Solutions. c. Snow Management Systems; a division of Contek, Inc.
2. Description: Snow guard rails fabricated from metal pipes, bars, or extrusions, anchored to brackets and equipped with three rails. 3. Material and Finish: Aluminum; mill
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, snow guard attachment, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare substrates for bonding snow guards.
B. Prime substrates according to snow guard manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install snow guards according to manufacturer's written instructions. Space rows as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Attachment for Standing-Seam Metal Roofing:
1. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roofing, or fastening methods that void metal roofing finish warranty.
SNOW GUARDS 077253 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Seam-Mounted, Rail-Type Snow Guards: Stainless-steel clamps attached to vertical ribs of standing-seam metal roof panels.
END OF SECTION 077253
SNOW GUARDS 077253 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone joint sealants.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements.
B. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 295. d. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-641. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995.
2.3 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C Type O (open-cell material) , and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal. b. Glass.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated based on prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes hollow-metal work.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 2. Section 081113 “Exterior Painting” for painting of hollow-metal doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of removable frames.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Custom Metal Products. 5. Daybar. 6. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 7. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 INTERIOR (UNINSULATED) DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Standard-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1.
1. Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.032 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
a. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. At locations where insulation is indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard , polystyrene, polyurethane, or polyisocyanurate, core at manufacturer's discretion.
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. b. Sidelite Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame. c. Construction: Knocked down.
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.3 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.
B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2..
1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with minimum A40 coating. a. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion unless indicated otherwise.
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A40 coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded.
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.4 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
C. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. d. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
C. Samples for Selection: For factory-finished doors.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.
2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Ampco. 3. Chappell Door Co. 4. Eggers Industries. 5. General Veneer Manufacturing Co.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
6. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company. 7. Haley Brothers, Inc. 8. Ipik Door Company. 9. Lambton Doors. 10. Marlite. 11. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 12. Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company. 13. Oshkosh Door Company. 14. Poncraft Door Company. 15. Vancouver Door Company. 16. VT Industries, Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard.
B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.
C. Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware and as follows:
a. 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. c. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.
3. Provide doors with structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: Select white maple. 3. Cut: Rift cut. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor- door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 20 feet or more. 8. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species - edge Type A. 9. Core: Particleboard. 10. Construction: Five or seven plies. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 11. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.
2.4 LIGHT FRAMES
A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads.
B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood- veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA- 156.115-W, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.
C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 4 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Factory finish doors.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 5, conversion varnish or System 11, catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores. 5. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire- rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 5 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
b. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
2. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 6 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Access doors and frames for ceilings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for roof hatches.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.
C. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Access Panel Solutions. 2. Acudor Products, Inc. 3. Alfab, Inc. 4. Babcock-Davis. 5. Cendrex Inc.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1 of 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
6. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Co.; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 7. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC. 8. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 9. Karp Associates, Inc. 10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 11. Maxam Metal Products Limited. 12. Metropolitan Door Industries Corp. 13. MIFAB, Inc. 14. Milcor Inc. 15. Nystrom, Inc. 16. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer. C. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges: 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size. 2. Locations: Ceiling. 3. Door Size: As indicated on Drawings 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage.
a. Finish: Factory finish.
5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 7. Hardware: Lock.
D. Hardware: 1. Lock: Cylinder.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 2 of 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. 1. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.
1. For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:
1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 2. Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 3 of 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 083113
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 4 of 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Insulated service doors.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. For exterior components, include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for excluding and draining moisture to the exterior. 4. Show locations of controls, locking devices, and other accessories.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory-applied finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads.
1. Design Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward and outward. 2. Testing: According to ASTM E 330. 3. Deflection Limits: Design overhead coiling doors to withstand design wind load without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. 4. Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable under uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. wind load, acting inward and outward.
2.3 DOOR ASSEMBLY
A. Insulated Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.
B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.
C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph when tested according to ASTM E 283 or DASMA 105.
D. Curtain R-Value: 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu.
E. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel.
F. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 2-5/8-inch center-to-center height. 1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal. 2. Gasket Seal. Manufacturer's standard continuous gaskets between slats.
G. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel and finished to match door.
H. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.
I. Hood: Galvanized steel.
1. Shape: Round or Square. 2. Mounting: Face of wall.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
J. Locking Devices: Equip door with chain lock keeper.
K. Manual Door Operator: Chain-hoist operator.
L. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals.
M. Door Finish: 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face.
2.4 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:
1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel sheet; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 zinc coating; nominal sheet thickness (coated) of 0.028 inch; and as required. 2. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84 or UL 723. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces. 3. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face, with minimum steel thickness of 0.010 inch.
B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
2.5 HOODS
A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.
1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch- thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
2.6 LOCKING DEVICES
A. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.7 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES
A. Weatherseals for Exterior Doors: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire exterior perimeter of door for a weather-resistant installation unless otherwise indicated.
1. At door head, use 1/8-inch- thick, replaceable, continuous-sheet baffle secured to inside of hood or field- installed on the header. 2. At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- thick seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene.
2.8 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self- lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, seamless or welded carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load.
C. Counterbalance Spring: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs.
D. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.
E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.
2.9 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.
B. Chain-Hoist Operator: Consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel and guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum [25-lbf] [30-lbf]
2.10 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.11 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES
A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.
B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.
1. Adjust exterior doors and components to be weather-resistant.
B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.
END OF SECTION 083323
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior storefront framing. 2. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Glazing-to-glazing contact. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. g. Sealant failure. h. Failure of operating units.
B. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1 of 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Deflection of Framing Members:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller.
D. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..
F. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..
1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes.
G. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have U-factor of not more than 0.36 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have a SHGC of no greater than 0.48 as determined according to NFRC 200.
H. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.
a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal- surface temperature of 180 deg F.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 2 of 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F.
3. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.
I. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 52 when tested according to AAMA 1503.
J. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum- framed systems.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. 2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations.
C. Samples for Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements.
B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 3 of 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
B. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
C. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 4 of 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Entrance Door Hardware:
1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware. 2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 3. TRACO. 4. United States Aluminum. 5. YKK AP America Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC- SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 5 of 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.3 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Front. 4. Finish: Baked-enamel or powder-coat finish.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
D. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
1. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E. Venting Windows: Manufacturer's standard units, complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, with self-flashing mounting fins, and as follows:
1. Window Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Minimum Performance Class: CW. 3. Minimum Performance Grade: 60. 4. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard; of aluminum, stainless steel, die-cast steel, malleable iron, or bronze; including the following: a. Spring-loaded, snap-type lock at jambs. b. Steel or bronze operating arms. 5. Insect Screens: Provide removable insect screen on each operable exterior sash, with screen frame finished to match window unit, complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201, and as follows: a. Fabric: Manufacturer's standard aluminum wire fabric or glass-fiber mesh fabric.
6. Glazing: Same as adjacent aluminum-framed storefront glazing. 7. Finish: Match adjacent aluminum-framed storefront finish.
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 6 of 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.
2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.
a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.
2. Door Design: As indicated.
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above floor or ground plane.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 7 of 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.
D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system.
E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.
F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 8 of 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 9 of 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.
B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer.
1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3- second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.
END OF SECTION 084113
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 10 of 10 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 085200 - WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes aluminum-clad wood windows.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for wood windows.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.
C. Samples for Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.
D. Product Schedule: For wood windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each type of wood window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating wood windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports, and calculations.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 1 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to wood window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, and air infiltration. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Aluminum-Cladding Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows:
a. Pella Corporation. b. Andersen Windows Inc.; Andersen Corporation. c. Peachtree Doors and Windows. d. Vetter. e. Weather Shield Mfg., Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Window Certification: WDMA certified with label attached to each window.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 2 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:
1. Minimum Performance Class: AW. 2. Minimum Performance Grade: 40.
C. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.
D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.40.
E. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Rated for not less than 35 STC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413.
F. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Capable of resisting impact from windborne debris based on testing glazed windows identical to those specified, according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.3 WOOD WINDOWS
A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings: 1. Double hung.
B. Frames and Sashes: Fine-grained wood lumber complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440; kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide; water-repellent preservative treated.
1. Exterior Finish: Aluminum-clad wood.
a. Aluminum Finish: Manufacturer's standard fluoropolymer two-coat system with fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight and complying with AAMA 2605. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Interior Finish: Manufacturer's standard stain-and varnish-finish.
a. Exposed Unfinished Wood Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard species. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190, certified through IGCC as complying with requirements of IGCC.
1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
a. Tint: Clear. b. Kind: Fully tempered.
2. Lites: Two. 3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with air or argon. 4. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 3 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
5. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.
1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E. Hung Window Hardware:
1. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Complying with AAMA 902, concealed, of size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position. 2. Locks and Latches: Allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only. 3. Tilt Hardware: Releasing tilt latch allows sash to pivot about horizontal axis to facilitate cleaning exterior surfaces from the interior.
F. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.
G. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.
2.4 SECURITY SCREENS
A. General: Fabricate security screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash.
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kane Manufacturing Corporation Level 4 Security Screen Model A-Pro-Z or approved equal.
C. Type and Location: Full, surface mounted outside per manufacturer’s installation instructions for all double-hung sashes.
D. Aluminum Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1. Finish for Exterior Screen Frames: Baked-on organic coating in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E. Stainless Steel Wire Fabric: 12 mesh of 0.028-inch-diameter wire.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 4 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for installing and anchoring windows.
B. Glaze wood windows in the factory.
C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.
D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units.
E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.
C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 5 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.
C. Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.
D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 085200
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 6 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Other Action Submittals:
1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. b. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and date each page. c. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. d. Content: Include the following information:
1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 6) Mounting locations for door hardware. 7) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.
2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.
B. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Requirements for access control. 5. Address for delivery of keys.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.
C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article to comply with requirements in this Section.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products complying with BHMA designations referenced. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations and requirements for description, quality, and function.
2.2 HINGES
A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
b. Bommer Industries, Inc. c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. d. Hager Companies. e. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. f. Lawrence Hardware Inc. g. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. PBB, Inc. i. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
2.3 CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120-inch- thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete.
B. Pin-and-Barrel-Type Hinges:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Hager Companies. b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. c. Lawrence Hardware Inc. d. Markar Architectural Products, Inc.; a subsidiary of Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. e. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. f. Select Products Limited. g. Zero International.
2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:
1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw.
C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. D. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: Forged. 2. Escutcheons (Roses): Forged. 3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. 4. Operating Device: Lever with escutcheons (roses).
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing.
F. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; n ASSA ABLOY Group Company. e. Falcon Lock; An Ingersoll-Rand Company. f. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black & Decker Corp. company. g. Marks USA. h. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. i. PDQ Manufacturing. j. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. k. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. l. Weiser Lock Corp.; a Black & Decker Corp. company. m. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.5 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31; Grade 1; with faceplate to suit lock and frame.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Hager Companies. c. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.
2.6 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. ASSA, Inc.; An ASSA ABLOY Group Company. c. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand company. f. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. i. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are removable; face finished to match lockset.
C. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
2.7 KEYING
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders.
B. Keys: Nickel silver.
1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:
a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.
2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:
a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five.
2.8 SURFACE CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America. d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand company. e. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black & Decker Corp. company. f. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company. g. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. i. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. j. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.9 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Wall-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum base metal.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. c. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. d. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. e. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. f. Door Controls International, Inc. g. Hager Companies. h. Hiawatha, Inc. i. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. j. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. k. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. l. Trimco.
2.10 DOOR GASKETING
A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Hager Companies. b. M-D Building Products, Inc. c. National Guard Products. d. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
f. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated. g. Zero International.
2.11 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Hager Companies. b. M-D Building Products, Inc. c. National Guard Products. d. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Reese Enterprises, Inc. f. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated. h. Zero International.
2.12 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE
A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. d. Hager Companies. e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. f. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. g. Trimco.
2.13 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.
1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Fire-Rated Applications:
a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:
1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood doors and frames. 2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames. b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 1) Closers to doors and frames. 2) Surface-mounted exit devices.
3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 5. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
2.14 FINISHES
A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
E. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
F. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Hardware Set No. H-1: Main Entry - Double 1. Hinges: 2 ea - ANSI/BHMA A51011B US32D(630). 2. Door Closer: 2 ea - ANSI/BHMA C02011 3. Exit Device: 2 ea - ANSI/BHMA Type 2 Function F75 4. Weatherstripping: ANSI/BHMA R0Y165 and R0Y 416 5. Threshold: ANSI/BHMA J32180
B. Hardware Set No. H-2: Vestibule - Access Controlled – See Electrical for Additional Requirements 1. Hinges: 2 ea – 24V Electrified with integral request to exit - ANSI/BHMA A51011B US32D(630). 2. Door Closer: 2 ea - ANSI/BHMA C02011 3. Exit Device: 2 ea - 24V Electrified with integral request to exit - ANSI/BHMA Type 2 Function F84 4. Weatherstripping: ANSI/BHMA R0Y165 and R0Y 416 5. Threshold: ANSI/BHMA J32180
C. Hardware Set No. H-3: Entry 1. Hinges: 3 ea - ANSI/BHMA A5112, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” US32D(630). 2. Door Closer: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA C02011 3. Lockset: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA Function F86 Lever Trim US32D(630). 4. Weatherstripping: ANSI/BHMA R0Y165 5. Threshold: ANSI/BHMA J32120
D. Hardware Set No. H-4: Entry - Double 1. Hinges: 6 ea - ANSI/BHMA A5112, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” US32D(630). 2. Lockset: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA Function F86 Lever Trim US32D(630). 3. Flush Bolt: ANSI/BHMA L04082 4. Weatherstripping: ANSI/BHMA R0Y165
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
5. Threshold: ANSI/BHMA J32120
E. Hardware Set No. H-5: Offices, Conference, Storage and Mechanical 1. Hinges: 3 ea - ANSI/BHMA A5112, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” US32D(630). 2. Lockset: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA Function F84 Lever Trim US32D(630). 3. Wall Bumper: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA L02101 Convex Type US32D (630). 4. Silencers: 3ea - ANSI/BHMA L03011
F. Hardware Set No. H-6 Classroom 1. Hinges: 3 ea - ANSI/BHMA A5112, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” US32D(630). 2. Lockset: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA Function F110 Lever Trim US32D(630). 3. Wall Bumper: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA L02101 Convex Type US32D (630). 4. Silencers: 3ea - ANSI/BHMA L03011
G. Hardware Set No. H-7: Toilet Rooms – Single Occupant 1. Hinges: 3 ea - ANSI/BHMA A5112, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” US32D(630). 2. Door Closer: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA C02011 3. Lockset: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA Function F76A Lever Trim US32D(630). 4. Kick Plate: 1 ea – ANSI/BHMA J102 10”x2” Less Door Width (US32D (630). 5. Wall Bumper: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA L02251 Concave Type US32D (630). 6. Silencers: 3ea - ANSI/BHMA L03011
H. Hardware Set No. H-8: Toilet Rooms – Multiple Occupant 1. Hinges: 3 ea - ANSI/BHMA A5112, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” US32D(630). 2. Door Closer: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA C02011 3. Operating Trim: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA J304 – 3”x12”, J401 US32D(630). 4. Kick Plate: 1 ea – ANSI/BHMA J102 10”x2” Less Door Width (US32D (630). 5. Wall Bumper: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA L02251 Concave Type US32D (630). 6. Silencers: 3ea - ANSI/BHMA L03011
I. Hardware Set No. H-9: Classroom/Storage Double 1. Hinges: 6 ea - ANSI/BHMA A5112, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” US32D(630). 2. Lockset: 1 ea - ANSI/BHMA Function F84 Lever Trim US32D(630). 3. Wall Bumper: 2 ea - ANSI/BHMA L02101 Convex Type US32D (630). 4. Flush Bolt: ANSI/BHMA L04082 5. Silencers: 6 ea - ANSI/BHMA L03011
END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13 of 13 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Storefront framing. 3. Glazed entrances. 4. Interior borrowed lites.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
GLAZING 088000 - 1 of 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches square. 1. Coated glass. 2. Insulating glass.
C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets and sealants, in 12-inch lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.
D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For installers.
B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for tinted glass, coated glass, insulating glass, glazing sealants, and glazing gaskets.
1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.
D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
GLAZING 088000 - 2 of 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.
E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.
F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
G. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
H. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
GLAZING 088000 - 3 of 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project.
B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
GLAZING 088000 - 4 of 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
B. Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified.
1. Tint Color: As selected by the Architect from Manufacturer’s full range.
2.3 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.
1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article.
2.4 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
GLAZING 088000 - 5 of 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilGlaze II SCS2800. d. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 295. e. Pecora Corporation; 864. f. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995. g. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.
2.6 GLAZING TAPES
A. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
GLAZING 088000 - 6 of 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
2.9 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type M Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass or Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.
1. To be installed at all interior doors and glazed partitions. Tempered glazing shall be used for any glazed panel that is within 18” of the floor or where required by code. 2. Thickness: 1/4"
2.10 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type IG-1 Low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 4.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4. Tint Color: Gray to match existing 5. Interspace Content: Argon. 6. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 7. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface. 8. Visible Light Transmittance: Maximum possible based on tint and visible reflectance. 9. U-Factor: 0.45 maximum. 10. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: Match existing. 11. Provide safety glazing labeling.
GLAZING 088000 - 7 of 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
GLAZING 088000 - 8 of 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.
L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
GLAZING 088000 - 9 of 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure- glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
GLAZING 088000 - 10 of 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 088000
GLAZING 088000 - 11 of 11 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior and exterior gypsum board assemblies.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners and firestop tracks, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESCRIPTION
A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1 of 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. 4) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 5) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track.
D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System. b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0269 inch.
F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0269 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2 of 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
1. Space studs as follows:
a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. b. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3 of 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
D. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4 of 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland. 8. USG Corporation.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
2.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Continental Building Products, LLC. d. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific. h. United States Gypsum Company.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Core: 5/8 inch.
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Board: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third and fourth coats, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Exterior Gypsum Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.
F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
G. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Wallboard Type: Vertical and horizontal surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mold-Resistant Type: At all toilet room surfaces.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS
A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1. Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. 2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges unless otherwise indicated.
C. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Porcelain tile. 2. Crack isolation membrane. 3. Metal edge strips.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
C. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples for Selection: For tile, grout, and accessories involving color selection.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1 of 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type from single source or producer.
1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.
1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain waterproof membrane from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials.
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer: 1. Crack isolation membrane. 2. Metal edge strips.
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 2 of 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.
C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Ceramic Tile Type PORC-1: Unglazed, unpolished porcelain tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dal-Tile Haut Monde or approved equal. 2. Face Size: 12 by 24 inches. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch 4. Joint Width:. 3/16 inch (floor suggested grout) 5. Face: Plain with square edges. 6. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 7. Tile Color: HM05 Elite Grey or as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 8. Grout Color: As selected by architect from manufacturers full range
B. Ceramic Tile Type PORC-2: Unglazed, unpolished porcelain tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dal-Tile Kimona Silk or approved equal. 2. Face Size: 12 by 24 inches. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Joint Width: 3/16 inch 5. Face: Plain with square edges. 6. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 7. Tile Color: P320 White Orchid or as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 8. Grout Color: As selected by architect from manufacturers full range
C. Ceramic Tile Type PORC-3: Unglazed, unpolished porcelain tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dal-Tile Haut Monde or approved equal. 2. Face Size: 12 by 24 inches 3. Retain "Face Size Variation" Subparagraph below if required for narrow joints. Rectified tiles have their edges ground to minimize face size variation. See the Evaluations.
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 3 of 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
4. Thickness: 5/16 inch 5. Joint Width: 3/16 inch 6. Face: Plain with square edges. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Tile Color: HM06 Empire Black or as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 9. Grout Color: As selected by architect from manufacturers full range
D. Ceramic Tile Type PORC-4: Polished porcelain tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dal-Tile Kimona Silk or approved equal. 2. Face Size: 12 by 24 inches 3. Thickness: 3/8 inch 4. Joint Width: 1/8 inch 5. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 6. Tile Color: P325 Morning Dove or as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 7. Grout Color: As selected by architect from manufacturers full range
2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.
2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Standard Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.1.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.
2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 4 of 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.6 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, consisting of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; nickel silver exposed-edge material.
C. Metal Accent Strips: Metal trim by Schluter, Rondec profile, brushed stainless steel finish or profile indicated on Contract Drawings.
D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.
E. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. b. Custom Building Products. c. Jamo Inc. d. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 5 of 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
e. Summitville Tiles, Inc. f. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.
2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by waterproofing material manufacturer.
B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 6 of 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. c. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush.
F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Porcelain Tile: 1/4 inch.
H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
I. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
3.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.
B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it.
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 7 of 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.
C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.
3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:
1. Ceramic Tile Installation Type A: TCNA F125-Full; thinset mortar on crack isolation membrane.
a. Ceramic Tile Type: PORC-1, PORC-2. b. Thinset Mortar: Standard dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Standard sanded grout.
B. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:
1. Ceramic Tile Installation Type B: TCNA W243; thinset mortar on gypsum board.
a. Ceramic Tile Type: PORC-3, PORC-4, PORC-5. b. Thinset Mortar: Standard dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.
END OF SECTION 093013
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 8 of 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Acoustical tiles for ceilings. 2. Concealed suspension systems.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6-inches-in size.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension-system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.
B. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry an approved independent laboratory classification of NRC, CAC, and AC.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 1 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for testing indicated.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 2 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated.
D. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical tiles are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES (ATC)
A. Classification: Provide tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:
1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. 2. Pattern: E (lightly textured).
B. Color: White.
C. LR: Not less than 0.90.
D. NRC: Not less than 0.90.
E. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) : Not less than 25.
F. Edge/Joint Detail: Square, kerfed and rabbeted.
G. Thickness: 1 inch minimum.
H. Modular Size: As indicated on drawings.
I. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical tiles treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 3 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.
B. Color: White.
2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations complying with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical tile edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch diameter wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 4 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 5 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension-system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material.
1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile. 2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 095123
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 6 of 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 095200 – ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustic Metal Ceiling Panels. 2. Exposed grid suspension system. 3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings. 4. Perimeter Trim.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 095123 – Acoustical Tile Ceilings. 2. Division 23 - HVAC 3. Division 26 - Electrical
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 2. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 3. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. 5. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. 6. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. 7. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 8. ASTM E 580 Installation of Metal Suspension Systems in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint. 9. ASTM E 1111 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings Systems 10. ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum
ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS 095200 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
11. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products
B. International Building Code
C. ASHRAE Standard 62 1 2004 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
D. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
E. ASCE 7 American Society of Civil Engineers, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
F. International Code Council-Evaluation Services - AC 156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification Testing of Non-structural Components.
G. International Code Council-Evaluation Services Report - Seismic Engineer Report.
1. ESR 1308 - Armstrong T-Bar or Dimensional Suspension.
H. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials - Seismic Engineer Report
1. 0244 - Armstrong Single Span Suspension System
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required.
B. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and 4 foot cross tees.
C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical ceilings show locations of items that are to be coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings.
D. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry an approved independent laboratory classification of NRC, CAC, and AC.
E. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an Underwriter's Laboratory classification of acoustical performance on every carton, subcontractor shall be required to send material from every production run appearing on the job to an independent or NVLAP approved laboratory for testing, at the architect's or owner's discretion. All products not conforming to manufacturer's current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with complying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer.
ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS 095200 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 Classification.
C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical ceiling work with installers of related work including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping 2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects
B. Warranty Period:
1. Acoustical Metal panels: Ten (30) years from date of substantial completion 2. Grid: Ten (30) years from date of substantial completion
C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS 095200 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.
1. Acoustical Metal Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Acoustical Panels Type WD:
1. Surface Texture: Smooth 2. Composition: Metal 3. Color: Effects Cherry and Effects Cherry Exterior 4. Size: 6 in x 96 in 5. Edge Profile: Square with extended flange. 6. Perforation Option: Unperforated 7. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A. 8. Light Reflectance (LR) White Panel: ASTM E 1477; 0.77 9. Dimensional Stability: Standard 10. Acceptable Product: METALWORKS Linear and Linear Exterior 7160 as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries or Architect’s approved equal.
2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Components:
Main beams and cross tees, base metal and end detail, fabricated from commercial quality hot dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double- web steel construction with type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping prefinished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching.
1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 Heavy Duty. 2. Color: Gun Metal Grey and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted otherwise. 3. Acceptable Product: PRELUDE XL 15/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries or Architect’s approved equal.
B. Attachment Devices: 1. Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.
C. Wire for Hangars and Ties:
ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS 095200 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft annealed, with a yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures.
B. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer installation instructions
B. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.
D. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas and vertical surfaces.
E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on flanges of main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces. Support edges by wall moldings.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Replace damaged and broken panels.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of ceilings panels, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 095200
ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS 095200 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 096229 - CORK WALL TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cork wall tile.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include cork wall tile layout.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type, color, pattern, and finish of cork wall tile required.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of cork wall tile to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Cork Wall Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and finish of cork wall tile installed.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store cork wall tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store cork wall tile on flat surfaces.
CORK WALL TILE 096229 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F (18 deg C) or more than 75 deg F (24 deg C) where relative humidity is between 45 and 65 percent, in spaces to receive cork wall tile during the following periods:
1. 72 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 72 hours after installation.
B. Install cork wall tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Installed tile shall be Class C material. Provide Flame Stop II, by Flame Stop, Inc. if necessary to achieve rating.
2.2 CORK WALL TILE (CRK)
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide American Cork Products Company; Cork Wall Tile, or comparable product approved by the Architect.
B. Composition: 100 percent natural cork bark and recycled cork granules and set in a natural or synthetic, flexible resin matrix; homogeneous and uniform in composition throughout the tile thickness.
C. Nominal Thickness: 0.25 inch.
D. Nominal Size: 12 by 24 inches (300 by 600 mm).
E. Color: Blizzard
F. Factory Finish: Wax
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: Liquid Nails “Heavy Duty” or type recommended by wall tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit cork wall tile and substrate conditions indicated.
CORK WALL TILE 096229 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of cork wall tile.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to cork tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of cork wall tiles.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install cork wall tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1. At least 72 hours in advance of installation, move cork wall tile products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
D. Immediately before installation, clean substrates to be covered by cork wall tiles.
3.3 WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing cork wall tile.
B. Mix together tiles from each carton to ensure uniform distribution of shade.
C. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
D. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, so tiles at opposite edges are of equal width.
E. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.
F. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly.
G. Adhere tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
CORK WALL TILE 096229 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting cork wall tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing cork wall tile installation:
1. Remove blemishes from surfaces.
a. Remove installation adhesive from surfaces. 2. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect cork wall tiles from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 096229
CORK WALL TILE 096229 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples for Selection: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 of 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johnsonite Resilient Rubber Wall Base – Traditional with Toe Profile or comparable product.
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic), Group I (solid, homogeneous). 1. Style and Location: a. Style B, Cove: At locations indicated on Drawings.
C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D. Height: 4 inches.
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside Corners: Job formed.
G. Inside Corners: Job formed.
H. Colors: Grey WG 48 or approved equal.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 of 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.
3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.
a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 of 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4 of 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid vinyl floor tile.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
C. Samples for Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
2.2 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE (LVT)
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Patcraft Crossover or approved equal.
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.
1. Class: Class III, printed film vinyl plank. 2. Type: B, embossed surface.
C. Thickness: 0.197 inch.
D. Size: 7.28 by 47.72 inches.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 2 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
E. Colors and Patterns: Kayak-V2 and Nature-V2 or as selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE (VCT-1 and VCT-2)
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johnsonite, Azrock on Drawings or approved equal.
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
E. Colors and Patterns: V-214 Ashes and V-220 Cast Pewter or as selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Underlayment: See Section 061600 “Sheathing”.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 3 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
B. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
C. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 4 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply one coat.
E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096519
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 5 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes modular carpet tile.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate.
B. Samples: For each of the following products.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples.
1.4 IINFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.
C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Dimensional instability. c. Excess static discharge. d. Loss of tuft-bind strength. e. Loss of face fiber. f. Delamination.
3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 2 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE (CPT-1 and CPT-2)
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by Tandus Centiva as indicated on Drawings or Architect’s approved equal.
B. Color: As indicated on contract drawings.
C. Style: As indicated on contract drawings.
D. Installed Pattern: Ashlar
E. Size: 18 by 36 inches.
F. Applied Treatments:
1. Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment. 2. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment that protects carpet tiles as follows:
a. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish and height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance.
B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 3 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure- sensitive adhesive.
C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D. Maintain pile-direction patterns recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 4 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 096813
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 5 of 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Gypsum board. 2. Steel.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
B. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
C. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
B. Samples for Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. California Paints. 4. Euclid Chemical Company. 5. ICI Paints. 6. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 7. Pratt & Lambert. 8. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.
E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 4. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex System MPI EXT 9.2A:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, exterior (reduced), MPI #6.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15.
B. Steel Substrates: 1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: All steel surfaces to be shop primed.
b. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
END OF SECTION 099113
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Gypsum board.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
B. Samples for Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. California Paints. 4. Columbia Paint & Coatings. 5. Euclid Chemical Company. 6. ICI Paints. 7. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 8. Pratt & Lambert.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Colors: As indicated on Drawings or approved equal.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.
2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS
A. Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1): MPI #53.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #52.
C. Latex, Interior, Semi-Gloss, (Gloss Level 5): MPI #54.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.
E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 4. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Steel Substrates:
1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: All steel surfaces to be shop primed. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Ceiling Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. d. Walls Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.
END OF SECTION 099123
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates:
1. Interior Substrates:
a. Concrete, horizontal surfaces.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in the Interior High-Performance Coating Schedule for the coating category indicated.
2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 3. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.
D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.
C. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
C. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces.
1. Clear (Two-Component) Polyurethane System MPI INT 3.2K:
a. Prime Coat: Two-component polyurethane matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two component (MPI Gloss Level 4 - Satin Finish), MPI #78
1) SureCrete DK 400WB Clear Water Based Polyurethane or equal.
END OF SECTION 099600
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Visual display board assemblies.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual display units.
B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work. 2. Show locations of panel joints. 3. Include sections of typical trim members.
C. Samples: For each type of visual display unit indicated.
1. Visual Display Panel: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), with facing, core, and backing indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required. 2. Trim: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long sections of each trim profile. 3. Display Rail: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long section of each type.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance manuals.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece, provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.
2. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY
A. Visual Display Board Assembly: Factory fabricated.
1. Assembly: Markerboard. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Width: 8 foot. 4. Height: 4 foot 5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall.
B. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on core indicated.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Factory-Applied Wood Trim: Red oak, not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick; standard size and shape with transparent finish, stained to match wood doors.
D. Joints: Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect.
E. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard; continuous.
1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end closures.
F. Display Rail: Manufacturer's standard, extruded-aluminum display rail with plastic- impregnated-cork insert, end stops, designed to hold accessories.
1. Size: 2 inches (50 mm) high by full length of visual display unit. 2. Tackboard Insert Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 3. Aluminum Color: Match finish of visual display assembly trim.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or three- coat process.
B. Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Sheet: Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting of granulated cork, linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are mixed and calendared onto fabric backing; with washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout.
C. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered.
D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.
E. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer.
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.
C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display units and wall surfaces.
D. Prime wall surfaces indicated to receive visual display units and as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and visual display unit manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
B. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Adhere to wall surfaces with egg-size adhesive gobs at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c., horizontally and vertically.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room.
B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.
END OF SECTION 101100
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 101423 - PANEL SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Room-identification signs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.
1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.
C. Samples Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.
1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.
D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings.
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs.
2.2 SIGNS
A. Room-Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Takeform; Fusion or architect’s approved equal.
a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign, 0.035 inches think minimum high pressure surface laminate. b. Sign Size: As indicated on Contract Drawings. c. Engraved Graphics: Characters engraved through plastic-laminate face sheet to expose contrasting phenolic core. d. Plastic-Laminate Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. e. Core Color: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.
a. Edge Condition: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Rounded to radius.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Text and Typeface: Characters and Braille typeface as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Finish characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color.
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.3 PANEL-SIGN MATERIALS
A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).
B. Plastic-Laminate Sheet: NEMA LD 3, general-purpose HGS grade.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with adhesive on both sides.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.
B. Surface-Engraved Graphics: Machine engrave characters and other graphic devices into panel surface indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth. 1. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate sheet to expose contrasting core ply.
2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work.
B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation.
B. Room-Identification Signs and Other Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls according to accessibility standard.
C. Mounting Methods: 1. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 101423
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 102113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.
B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show locations of floor drains.
C. Samples for Selection: For each type of toilet compartment material indicated.
1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.
2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Scranton Products or approved equal.
Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor mounted, overhead braced.
C. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.
1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Color and Pattern: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.
E. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel.
2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories.
1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door.
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.
B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221.
C. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584.
D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455.
E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
F. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.
G. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32- inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.
2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. a. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 102113.19
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to overhead structural system. 2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for fire-rated assemblies and sound barrier construction above the ceiling at track.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NIC: Noise Isolation Class.
B. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
C. STC: Sound Transmission Class.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing.
1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Panel Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches (75 mm) square. 2. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long. 3. Hardware: One of each exposed door-operating device.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support- beam, mounting-hole template.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition.
D. Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
E. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Panel Finish-Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of two panels when installed.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Operable panel partitions shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the partition panels will remain in place without separation of any parts from the system when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
B. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:
1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.
2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Modernfold, Inc; Acousti-Seal Encore – Single Panel partition.
B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, individual panels.
C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities.
D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.
1. Panel Width: 5 foot 5 inch Expandable Panel / 4 foot 0.38 inch Intermediate Panels
E. STC: Not less than 52.
F. Panel Weight: 10 lb/sq. ft. (50 kg/sq. m) maximum.
G. Panel Thickness: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
H. Panel Materials: 1. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard nominal minimum thickness for uncoated steel. 2. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard minimum nominal thickness for uncoated steel.
I. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
2.3 SEALS
A. General: Provide seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance requirements and the following:
1. Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated. 2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed.
B. Vertical Seals: Deep-nesting, interlocking astragals mounted on each edge of panel, with continuous PVC acoustical seal.
C. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous-contact, extruded-PVC seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track.
D. Horizontal Bottom Seals: PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting panel movement.
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Mechanically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal by operating handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range not less than 2 inches (50 mm) between retracted seal and floor finish.
2.4 PANEL FINISH FACINGS
A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Apply one-piece, seamless facings free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects, with edges tightly butted, and with no gaps or overlaps. Horizontal seams are not permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished appearance. 2. Where facings with directional, repeating, or matching grain are indicated, mark facing top and attach facing in same direction. 3. Match facing pattern 72 inches (1830 mm) above finished floor.
B. Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard, mildew-resistant, washable, vinyl-coated fabric wall covering; complying with CFFA-W-101-D for type indicated; Class A. 1. Antimicrobial Treatment: Additives capable of inhibiting growth of bacteria, fungi, and yeasts. 2. Color/Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Paint: Manufacturer's standard factory-painted finish.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints.
2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted directly to overhead structural support, designed for operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch (2.54 mm) between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.
1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the panels; finished with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish. 2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; primed for field finish.
B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Multidirectional Carriers: Capable of negotiating intersections without track switches.
C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum.
D. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated.
E. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, corrosion-resistant, protective coating unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable panel partitions.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation.
C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.
D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.
E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning.
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.
END OF SECTION 102239
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" for metal armor, kick, mop, and push plates.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection unit.
B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall protection unit indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Corner Guards: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include examples of joinery, corners, top caps, and field splices.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, from manufacturer.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material.
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance manuals.
1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to plastic finishes and performance.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 4-foot- (1.2-m-) long units.
B. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same production run as installed units.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Revise subparagraph below to suit Project.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C).
a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact- resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material, thickness as indicated.
1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A. 2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543. 3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. 4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for Alloy 6063-T5.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.
2.2 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. American Floor Products Co., Inc. b. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. c. Balco, Inc. d. Construction Specialties, Inc. e. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation. f. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation.
2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-inch (2.0-mm) wall thickness; as follows:
a. Profile: Nominal 2-inch- (50-mm-) long leg and 1/4-inch (6-mm) corner radius. b. Height: 4 feet (1.2 m). c. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum]. 4. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips. 5. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
D. Miter corners and ends of wood handrails for returns.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall protection system components.
B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
1. Heights: 48 inches
2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation.
a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.1 m), splice aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches (305 mm). c. Adjust top caps as required to ensure tight seams.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.
B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 102600
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Washroom accessories. 2. Underlavatory guards. 3. Custodial accessories.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.
B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036- inch minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and- theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.2 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.
B. Toilet Paper Holder: 1. Description: Double-roll dispenser with shelf. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with theft-resistant spindle. 4. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
C. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser: 1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Lockset: Tumbler type. 5. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.
D. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle (PTD): 1. Mounting: Semi-Recessed. 2. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 700 multifold towels. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner. 5. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment.
E. Soap Dispenser: 1. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 2. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted. 3. Capacity: 40 oz.. 4. Materials: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type. 6. Refill Indicator: Window type.
F. Grab Bar: 1. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.
3. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 4. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit: 1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler lockset. 3. Receptacle: Removable. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
H. Mirror Unit 1. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick.
a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.
3. Size: 18”x36”.
2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. b. Truebro by IPS Corporation.
2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings.
3. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
4. Bradley Corporation. 5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
B. Mop and Broom Holder:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-239 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 3. Length: 34 inches 4. Hooks: Four. 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three. spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel. b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter stainless steel.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 102800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets.
1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.
D. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. b. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.
B. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 6mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).
2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET (FEC)
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. b. GMR International Equipment Corporation. c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. d. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. e. Larsens Manufacturing Company. f. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc. g. Nystrom, Inc. h. Potter Roemer LLC. i. Strike First Corporation of America.
B. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
C. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth.
D. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.
E. Door Material: Steel sheet.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
F. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.
G. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.
1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.
H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge of same material and finish as trim permitting door to open 180 degrees.
I. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER".
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical.
3. Alarm: Manufacturer's standard alarm that actuates when fire protection cabinet door is opened and that is powered by batteries.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations indicatedon Drawings and at mounting heights indicated below.
1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. Cabinets not to exceed 5’ above finished floor and bottom of cabinet. Must be mounted at a minimum of 4” above finished floor.
B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 104413
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 104413 "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher.
B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: 6 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. b. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. c. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. d. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. e. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. f. Potter Roemer LLC.
2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 104416
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 107113 - EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. SECTION INCLUDES
1. Fully fabricated custom Exterior Sun Control Devices
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Backing Supports, attachment, clips, and blocking to receive sun control devices.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA 2605 - High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.
B. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum.
D. American Welding Society- AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum .
E. ASTM B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
F. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
G. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
H. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufactures (NAAMM).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Standard components, sizes, shapes, and hardware description.
EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 107113 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Sun Control manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
a. Finish manufacturer's data sheet showing physical and performance characteristics. b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. c. Installation instructions and recommendations. d. Specimen warranty for finish, as specified herein. e. Maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, details with profiles, styles, part numbers, dimensions, materials, finishes, connections, method of anchorage, type of anchors and backing supports.
1. Differentiate between shop fabrication and field installation. 2. Indicate substrates and adjacent work specified in related sections with which the exterior sun control devices must be coordinated.
C. Samples: Submit samples, of each component, and fasteners to be utilized in Sun Control assembly with appropriate finish.
D. Structural calculations. Provide engineering calculations for the Sun Control Devices and mounting brackets, prepared by an engineer registered in the state the project is located.
E. Warranty: Provide written warranty that Sun Control products will be free of defective materials or workmanship for a period of one year from date of installation.
F. Certifications: Manufacturer's certification that Sun Control meets design criteria, Drawings and specification requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions by field measurement before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings.
B. Exterior Sun Control Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with continuous experience of 5 years.
C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in performing work of the type specified in this section
1. With minimum 3 years of documented experience in installation of exterior Sun Control devices similar to the Work of this Section. 2. Approved by Sun Control Device manufacturer.
D. Provide sun control devices from a single source. Sub-contracting of Sun Control assembly is not acceptable.
E. Welding Qualifications: Any welding performed either in the fabrication of the sun control devices or brackets must follow AWS welding standards.
EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 107113 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
1. Protect finishes by applying heavy duty removable plastic film during production. 2. Package for protection against transportation damage. 3. Provide markings to identify components consistently with drawings. 4. Exercise care in unloading, storing and installing sun control devices to prevent bending, warping, twisting and surface damage.
B. Store products protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer.
1.8 WARRANTY A. See manufacturer for additional information on extended warranty periods for high performance coatings for aluminum Sun Control Devices.
1. Kynar - Duranar (70% Kynar or Hylar 5000 fluoropolymer resin) - up to a 20 year warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTERIOR SUN SHADE SYSTEM A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide C.R. Laurence Custom Fabricated, pre-finished Aluminum Sun Control Devices; 36 inch projection, or architect’s approved equal. B. Components:
1. Outriggers: 1/4 - 1/2 inch thick aluminum plate; ASTM B 209, 5052-H32 alloy; size: 6 inches tall.
a. Square configuration
2. Mounting bracket options.
a. Wall mount bracket
3. Fascia: 1/8 inch thick aluminum extrusion; ASTM B 221, 6063-T5 alloy.
a. Square tube fascia; 1 x 6 inch
4. Blade options:
EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 107113 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
a. Rectangular tubes; Extruded aluminum rectangular shape; ASTM B 221, 6063-T5 alloy; size: 1 x 4.
5. Back plate: 1/2 inch thick by 8 inch wide aluminum bar; ASTM B 209, 6061-T6 alloy; continuous for full length of unit for mounting to structure. 6. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-Ferrous metal or hot dip galvanized anchors and inserts for installation and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use stainless steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drill-in place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 7. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be stainless steel bolts, studs, sheet metal screws, and other types of size and spacing as recommended by manufacturer for specific installation conditions and as detailed on approved shop drawings.
2.2 FABRICATION A. Provide fixed Sun Control Devices and accessories of design, material, sizes, depth, arrangement, and thickness as indicated on Drawings and as required for optimal performance with respect to strength; durability; and uniform appearance. B. Fabrication tolerances: Maximum allowable tolerances. 1. Bow: + - 1/4 inch. 2. Dimensional width or length: + - 1/8 inch. 3. Squareness: + - 1/8 inch.
2.3 FINISHES A. High Performance PVDF coating: Duranar contains 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 fluoropolymer resin; exceeds the performance requirements of AAMA 2605. 1. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate conditions in areas to receive the work. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and interface with adjacent work. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Upon receipt of Sun Control Devices, thoroughly examine units for damage. Promptly report any observed damage to manufacturer in writing. Include digital photographs of any observed damage as well as a copy of the Bill of Lading disclosing the damage.
3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to fabrication, field verify required dimensions. B. Coordinate Sun Control installation with provision of exterior wall system to ensure proper
EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 107113 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
structural support is provided, attachment of sun control devices is compatible with substrate, and weather tightness of exterior envelop is maintained.
3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installation of the work. B. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements so that the work will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure. C. Anchor Sun Control Devices to building substrate as indicated on drawings, and as specified. D. Separate dissimilar metals; use gasket fasteners, isolation shims, or isolation tape where needed to eliminate possibility of galvanic action between metals. E. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced members. Remove and replace any members damaged in the erection process as directed. F. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints. G. Sun Control Device installation:
1. Layout and verify centerline dimensions prior to setting outriggers [wall brackets]. 2. Install the two outer most outriggers [wall brackets] plumb and level to the substrate. 3. Then, shoot a line from outrigger to outrigger to find the depth dimension of the outer line. 4. Proceed with the installation by attaching the middle outrigger, shimming as required. 5. Shims: Non-ferrous, as recommended by manufacturer. Verify centerline dimensions after shims are installed. H. Erection Tolerances:
1. Variation from level: +/- 1/8 inch maximum in 20 ft.- 0 inch runs, non-cumulative. 2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In-Line: 1/16 inch. I. Do not field cut or trim units. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer, and in accordance with his recommendations. Restore finish completely. Remove and replace members where cutting and trimming has impaired the strength or appearance of the assembly as directed.
3.4 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. C. Clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with recommendations found in AAMA 609 and 610. Do not use aggressive alkaline, TSP, acid cleaners, or abrasive cleaners on aluminum surfaces.
END OF SECTION 107113
EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 107113 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches (250 mm) long.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material.
1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.
1. Shadeband Material: Not less than [10 inches (250 mm)] [3 inches (76 mm)] square. Mark inside face of material if applicable. 2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide by 36 inches (900 mm) long for each type of roller shade indicated. 3. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches (250 mm) long.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
F. Roller-Shade Schedule.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material, signed by product manufacturer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS
A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Bead Chains: Nickel-plated metal.
a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.
B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.
1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of inside face of shade. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller. 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.
D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.
E. Shadebands:
1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.
a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
F. Installation Accessories:
1. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at bottom of site-constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-in attachment to wall clip without fasteners.
a. Closure-Panel Width: 2 inches (51 mm).
2. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops. 3. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
B. Light-Filtering Fabric (For Offices): Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.
1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Type: PVC-coated fiberglass. 3. Weave: Mesh. 4. Roll Width: 48 inches (1229 mm). 5. Orientation on Shadeband: Railroaded. 6. Openness Factor: 5 percent. 7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Light-Blocking Fabric (for Conference Room and Classrooms): Opaque fabric, stain and fade resistant.
1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer. 2. Type: Fiberglass textile with PVC film bonded to both sides. 3. Roll Width: 48 inches (1229 mm). 4. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt. 5. Features: Washable. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.
B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C): 1. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.
C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except as follows:
1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.2 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches (51 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 122413
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 224000 "Plumbing Fixtures" for nonintegral sinks and plumbing fittings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of material exposed to view.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1. Front: Radius edge with apron, 2 inches high with 3/8-inch radius.
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 1 of 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Backsplash: Radius edge with 3/8-inch radius.
B. Countertops: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.
C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material.
D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Provide field installed 3/4” plywood underlayment beneath all countertops. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide materials byLG Hausys America, Inc.; Hi-Macs, or Architect’s approved equal. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on the Contract Drawings.
2.3 COUNTERTOP SUPPORT BRACKETS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Rakks EH1824 or approved equal. 1. Size: 18”x24” 2. Material and Finish: Aluminum with mill finish.
2.4 COUNTERTOP EDGE SUPPORTS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Rakks EH-CS or approved equal. 1. Size: Length to match countertop support brackets. 2. Material and Finish: Finish to match countertop support brackets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
END OF SECTION 123661
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 2 of 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Roll-up rail mats. 2. Surface-mounted frames.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in ceramic tile to receive floor mats and frames.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for floor mats and frames.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Divisions between mat sections. 2. Perimeter floor frames.
C. Samples: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:
1. Floor Mat: Assembled sections of floor mat. 2. Tread Rail: Sample of each type and color. 3. Frame Members: Sample of each type and color.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals.
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 124813 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL
A. Structural Performance: Provide roll-up rail mats and frames capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Uniform floor load of 300 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Wheel load of 350 lb per wheel.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1.
2.2 ROLL-UP RAIL MATS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide C/S Group; Peidimat M1 or approved equal.
B. Roll-up, Aluminum-Rail Hinged Mats: Extruded-aluminum tread rails 1-1/2 inches wide by 7/16 inch thick, sitting on continuous vinyl cushions. 1. Tread Inserts: Fusion-bonded, polypropylene carpet insert; 1/4 inch high, 32 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Inserts: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 3. Rail Color: Mill finish. 4. Hinges: Aluminum. 5. Mat Size: As indicated.
2.3 FRAMES
1. Frames: Flexible vinyl edge-frame members, not less than 1 inch wide. a. Vinyl Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.
B. Surface-Mounted Frames: As indicated for permanent surface-mounted installation, complete with corner connectors, splice plates or connecting pins, and postinstalled expansion anchors.
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 124813 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Mill finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.
1. Anchor fixed surface-type frame members to floor with devices spaced as recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. After completing frame installation, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 124813
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 124813 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 220529 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Pipe hangers, supports, and associated anchors.
B. Flashing and sealing.
C. Sleeves and seals.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 22 0700 – Piping Insulation
B. Section 22 3000 – Plumbing – General
C. Division 5 – Miscellaneous Metal Work: Steel Angle and Channel
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI Standards
B. ASME Standards
C. Building Code of New York State – Piping Seismic Supports
D. Plumbing Code of New York State
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In conformance with Structural Safety Requirements of the Building Code of New York State.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature indicating specifications, load capacity and construction for products furnished.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 220529- 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for all Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
B. Hangers for all Pipe Sizes 2 to 3 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over.
D. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
E. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
F. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support.
G. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block non-conducting saddles in 90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness same as insulation thickness.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Beam Clamps.
1. Material: Malleable Iron. 2. Service: Recommended for use on American Standard I-beams and wide flange beams. 3. UL listed. 4. Manufacturer: Grinnell or equal.
2.3 HANGER RODS
A. Steel Hanger Rods: Cadmium plated, threaded both ends, threaded one end, and continuous threaded.
2.4 INSERTS AND FASTENERS
A. Concrete Inserts: Malleable iron body and nut of galvanized finish for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms. Manufacturer: CB - Universal or equal.
B. Concrete Fasteners: Steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection. Manufacturer: Phillips or equal.
C. Size inserts and fasteners to suit threaded hanger rods.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 220529- 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.5 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel.
B. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
C. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
D. Stuffing, Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.
E. Caulk: Acrylic sealant.
F. Fire Resistant Joint Sealers: Two part, foamed in place, silicone sealant formulated for use in through penetration fire stopping around pipe penetrations through fire rated walls and floors.
G. Sleeves shall be two sizes larger than the pipe passing through.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.
2.8 FINISH
A. Hangers and supports shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise specified.
B. Prime coat exposed black steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 220529- 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSERTS AND FASTENERS
A. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
B. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface.
C. Provide inserts and fasteners for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.
3.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Support piping as follows and in accordance with the Plumbing Code of New York State.
PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER
Less than 1 inch 5'-0" 3/8"
1 to 1-1/4 inch 6'-0" 3/8"
1-1/2 to 2 inch 9'-0" 3/8"
2-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0" 1/2"
4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 5/8"
PVC (All Sizes) 4'-0" 1/2"
C.I. Bell and Spigot 5'-0" Refer to Pipe Size (or No-Hub) and at Joints
B. Anchorage shall be provided to restrain drainage piping from axial movement. For pipe sizes greater than 4 inches, restraints shall be provided for drainpipes at all changes in diameter greater than two pipe sizes. Braces, blocks, rodding and other suitable methods as specified by the coupling manufacturer shall be utilized.
C. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2-inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
D. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
F. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 220529- 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
G. Support vertical piping at every [other] floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.
H. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.
I. Bases of stacks shall be supported by concrete, brick laid in cement mortar or metal brackets attached to the building.
J. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
K. Rigid support sway bracing shall be provided at changes in direction greater than 45 degrees for pipe sizes 4 inches and larger.
3.3 FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping, floor drains, etc. penetrates weather or waterproofed walls, floors and roofs.
B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counterflash and seal.
C. Seal drains watertight to adjacent materials.
3.4 SLEEVES
A. Cutting, notching, bored holes and penetrations shall be in accordance with the Plumbing Code of New York State.
B. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
C. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth and provide floor plate.
D. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with stuffing, fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
F. All penetrations shall be coordinated with General Contractor.
END OF SECTION 220529
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 220529- 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 220553 - PIPING IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Nameplates
B. Tags
C. Pipe Markers
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 22 0529 – Supports and Anchors
B. Section 22 0700 – Piping Insulation
C. Section 22 3000 – Plumbing - General
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
B. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Record actual locations of tagged valves.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION 220553 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color.
2.2 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.
C. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
2.3 PIPE MARKERS
A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.
2.4 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.
B. Color code as follows:
1. Green – Plumbing valves
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION 220553 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Identify pumps, water heater equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.
F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
G. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
H. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
I. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION 220553
PIPING IDENTIFICATION 220553 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 220700 - PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 22 0529 - Supports and Anchors.
B. Section 22 0553 - Piping Identification.
C. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing - General.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM Standards.
B. NFPA Standards.
C. UL Standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures, which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM, NFPA, and UL Standards.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience.
PIPING INSULATION 220700 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1.
B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.
C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.
D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS FIBER
A. Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K' ('ksi') value: ASTM C335, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: -20 degrees F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 300 degrees F. 4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket
1. ASTM C921, White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm inches. 3. Secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
C. Tie Wire: 18 gage stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive
1. Compatible with insulation.
E. Insulating Cement/Mastic
1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
PIPING INSULATION 220700 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
F. Fibrous Glass Fabric
1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.
G. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish
1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.
2.2 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic
1. Jacket: ASTM C921, One-piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off white color.
a) Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. b) Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c) Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm inches. d) Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 25. e) Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50. f) Thickness: 10 mil. g) Connections: Brush on welding adhesive, Tacks or Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
2. Covering Adhesive Mastic
a) Compatible with insulation.
B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed
1. Fabric: ASTM C921, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PIPING INSULATION 220700 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. On exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. 3. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. 4. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. 5. Insulate entire system.
D. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory applied or field applied. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. 3. PVC fitting covers may be used. 4. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
E. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert Material: ASTM C640 cork, hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.
F. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
G. For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces, finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
H. Insulate all domestic hot and cold water piping and exposed water and drain piping at handicapped lavs, sinks and water coolers.
3.3 GLASS FIBER INSULATION SCHEDULE
PIPING SYSTEMS PIPE SIZE THICKNESS Inch Inch A. Plumbing Systems
Domestic Hot Water Supply 1-1/4 inch & less 1" Domestic Hot Water Supply 1-1/2 inch & above 1-1/2" Domestic Hot Water Recirc All 1"
PIPING INSULATION 220700 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
Tempered Domestic Water Supply All 1" Domestic Cold Water Supply 1-1/4 inch & less 1/2" Domestic Cold Water Supply 1-1/2 inch & above 1"
END OF SECTION 220700
PIPING INSULATION 220700 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 223000 – PLUMBING – GENERAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Sanitary Sewer System B. Domestic Water System C. Propane Gas System D. Compressed Air System E. Indirect Waste Drainage System F. Pipe and Pipe Fittings G. Valves H. Floor Drains (NOTE: Provided in BID PACKAGE #1) I. Air Admittance Valves J. Cleanouts K. Oil Interceptor (NOTE: Provided in BID PACKAGE #1) L. Air Compressor and Accessories M. Backflow Preventers N. Shock Absorbers O. Hose Bibbs, Wall Hydrants P. Thermostatic Mixing Valves Q. Water Heaters R. In-line Pumps S. Laboratory Gas Turret T. Pressure Gauges U. Thermometers V. Water Meter
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 22 0529 - Supports and Anchors B. Section 22 0553 - Piping Identification C. Section 22 0700 - Piping Insulation D. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures E. Division 31 - Excavation, Trenching & Backfill F. Division 26 - Electrical Power Supply and Control Wiring and Connections for products provided under this Section shall be by the Division 26 Contractor.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI Standards B. ASME Standards C. ASSE Standards D. AWWA Standards E. ASTM Standards
PLUMBING – GENERAL 223000 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
F. PDI Standards G. Local and State Building Codes H. National Fuel Gas Code I. American Gas Association J. National Electrical Code K. AWS Standards
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Include data on pipe material, valves, drains, cleanouts, backflow preventer, hose bibs, water heater, pressure gauges, thermometers, air compressor, water meter and accessories.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Potable water supply system components, plumbing appliances, backflow prevention devices and water distribution system safety devices shall be Third-Party Certified.
B. Sanitary, vent, and storm system plastic pipe, fittings and pipe related components shall be Third- Party Certified. All other pipe materials shall be Third-Party Tested.
C. Special waste system components shall be Third-Party Tested.
D. All piping, valves, etc., shall meet the NSF Standard 61 (low lead).
E. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and be listed by NSF International.
F. Hubless Couplings: Standard, stainless-steel shielded, couplings shall conform to CISPI 310 and ASTM C 1277. Shield assemblies shall consist of a stainless steel bi-directional corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and an ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. Couplings shall bear the NSF Trademark, and be manufactured in the USA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING – ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A888, CISPI 301, hubless Fittings: ASTM A888, CISPI 310, hubless cast iron Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies NOTE: All cast iron pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed by NSF International. All couplings for hubless cast iron shall conform to CISPI 310 and be certified by NSF International.
PLUMBING – GENERAL 223000 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B306, DWV Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3, cast bronze, or ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade Sn50 Grooved mechanical couplings
C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785/D2665 Fittings: PVC Joints ASTM D2665, solvent weld
2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING – ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16.23 or B16.18, cast brass or ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper or, B16.29, wrought copper, ANSI/ICC 1002 Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade Sn95 Permanent push to connect Grooved mechanical couplings
2.3 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING – ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3, malleable iron; ASTM A536 ductile iron; ASTM A53 steel Joints: Screwed for pipe 2 inches and under, welded or grooved mechanical couplings for pipe over 2 inches.
2.4 PROPANE GAS PIPING – ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type Joints: Screwed for pipe 2 inches and under; ANSI/AWS D1.1, welded, for pipe over 2 inches.
2.5 INDIRECT WASTE DRAINAGE PIPING – ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type M, hard drawn Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast brass or ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade Sn95 Grooved mechanical couplings
PLUMBING – GENERAL 223000 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.6 OIL SEPARATOR VENT PIPING
A. ASTM A53, Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with screwed galvanized cast iron drainage fittings.
2.7 FLANGES, UNIONS, COUPLINGS, AND STRAINERS
A. Pipe size 2 inches and under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints.
B. Pipe size over 2 inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; neoprene gaskets for gas service.
C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, water impervious isolation barrier.
D. Strainers: Bronze "Y" type strainer, ,flanged connections, self-cleaning, tapped for closure plug, 20 mesh stainless steel screen; manufactured by Watts or equal.
2.8 BALL VALVES
A. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, solder or threaded ends with union.
B. Over 2 inches: Cast steel body; chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle, flanged.
2. 9 GAS COCKS
A. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends.
B. Over 2 inches: Cast iron body and plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, flanged ends.
2.10 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Bronze 45 degree swing disc, solder or screwed ends.
2.11 BALANCING VALVES
A. Calibrated flow measuring and balancing device, ½” through 2” to be 300 psi and 250 degrees F, Y- pattern globe type with soldered or threaded ends. Brass copper alloy body that provides di-electric protection, EPDM o-ring seals, multiple turn digital readout handwheel for balancing and concealed memory feature with hidden mechanical memory, built in check valves provided for connecting a portable diferential pressure meter for flow reading. Valve to provide flow measurement, flow balancing, shut-off with no drip seat and potential drain connection capabilities. Each valve can be installed in any direction without affecting flow measurement; Series 78K, 786 or 787 manufactured by Victaulic or equal. NOTE: No balancing valves using a ¼ turn device for setting will be permitted.
PLUMBING – GENERAL 223000 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.12 RELIEF VALVES
A. Bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled.
2.13 AIR FLOW CHECK VALVE
A. Machined steel air flow check valve, to be installed at compressor outlet. This valve will provide automatic pressure reduction, preventing air hose from whipping in the event of line rupture. A constant bleed hole in the valve allows the flow check to automatically open, or reset, after repair to hose is made; Manufactured by Aro or equal.
2.14 FULL BORE COUPLER CONNECTORS
A. Air hose quick connects - maximum inlet pressure 300 psig, valve carbon steel with zinc finish; Manufactured by Aro or equal.
2.15 AIR ADMITTANCE VALVE (AAV)
A. ASSE 1051; manufactured by Studor or equal.
2.16 CLEANOUTS
A. Interior Finished Wall Areas (WPCO): Line type with coated cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw; manufactured by Zurn or equal.
B. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas (CO): Caulked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders; manufactured by Zurn or equal.
2.17 AIR COMPRESSOR AND ACCESSORIES
A. Air Compressor: Portable, oil lubricated silent compressor, two ½ hp, 110volt, single phase, electrical cord and plug, 4.15 cfm output, 114 psi maximum pressure, 84 – 114 psi operating pressure, 13 gallon receiver tank,automatic operation, in – line regulator with moisture trap, line pressure gauge, tank pressure gauge, large rubber wheels, Model SIL-AIR 100-50 manufactured by Silentaire or equal.
2.18 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers (RPZ): ANSI/ASSE 1013; lead-free construction, bronze body for 2 inches and below and epoxy coated cast iron for larger than 2 inches; with bronze and plastic and stainless steel internal parts; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with 1/4 turn resilient seated ball valves for 2 inches or less; non-rising resilient wedge gate valves for larger than 2 inches; and four test cocks; Series 009 manufactured by Watts or equal.
PLUMBING – GENERAL 223000 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.19 SHOCK ABSORBERS (SA)
A. ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psig working pressure; manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products or equal.
2.20 HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS
A. Hose Bibb (HB): Lead-free bronze or brass, replaceable hexagonal disc, 3/4" hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed to finished spaces, with vacuum breaker in conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011; manufactured by Woodford or equal.
B. Wall Hydrant (WH): ANSI/ASSE 1019; lead-free. non-freeze, exposed, anti-siphon self- draining type, integral backflow preventer, chrome plated wall plate, ¾” hose thread spout, removable key, manufactured by Woodford or equal.
2.21 PROPANE GAS FIRED WATER HEATER (DWH-1)
A. Automatic, propane gas-fired, direct vent, 95% efficient, vertical storage type, with 60 gal capacity, 120,000 Btu/hr input, minimum recovery rate 138 gal/hr with 100 degrees F temperature rise, 150 psig maximum working pressure.
B. Glass lined welded steel tank; multiple flue passages, 4 inch diameter inspection port, thermally insulated with minimum 2 inches glass fiber, encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish; floor shield and legs.
C. Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, high-density magnesium anode, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve.
D. Unit approved by AGA as automatic storage water heater and automatic circulating tank water heater for operation at 180 degrees F.
E. Automatic water thermostat with temperature range adjustable from 120 to 180 degrees F, gas pressure regulator, multi-ribbon or tubular burner, 100 percent safety shut-off pilot and thermocouple.
F. Model BTH-120(A) manufactured by A. O. Smith or equal.
2.22 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS
A. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure; Impeller: Bronze; Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings; Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat; Drive: Flexible coupling; 1/25 HP, 92 watts, 0.80 full load amps, 2940 rpm, 115 volt, single phase; Model NBF-22 manufactured by Bell & Gossett or equal.
PLUMBING – GENERAL 223000 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.23 LABORATORY GAS TURRET
A. Deck mounted dual ball valves with turret mounted at 90 degrees for propane gas, chrome plated, serrated, full flow laboratory nozzle, shank assembly with male thread; Model 982-909-957-3KAGV manufactured by Chicago or equal.
2.24 PRESSURE GAUGE
A. Standard die cast case, 4 1/2-inch diameter white dial with black figures, Bourdon type glass front and bronze spring; select range so that normal operating pressure reads approximately at midscale; install with stop cock; located after water meter and when shown on drawings; manufactured by Trerice or equal.
2.25 THERMOMETERS
A. Straight or inclined as required for easy reading from floor level: Cast aluminum case, glass front, 8 inches long; Range 60F to 250F, install in copper or stainless steel wells, completely immersed in liquid, socket to be separable and mounted in a tee or other fittings; install in line leaving every water heater and when on drawings; manufactured by Trerice or equal.
2.26 WATER METER
A. All bronze meter, 150 psi maximum operating pressure, 100 gpm maximum flow capacity, remote readout, register, dial arrangement and manufacturer shall conform to local Water Authority.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends, remove burrs and bevel plain end of ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, inside and outside of pipe, before assembly.
C. Remove welding slag or foreign material from pipe and fitting materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing piping, joints or connected equipment.
PLUMBING – GENERAL 223000 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
H. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.
I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting.
K. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot for piping 3 inches & smaller and 1/8 inch per foot for piping 4 inches and larger.
L. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
N. Provide one plug cock wrench for every ten plug cocks.
O. Compressed air piping shall pitch to low point in system with 6-inch long drip pockets and removable caps at low points. Take all branch lines from top of horizontal lines. Grade in direction of flow 1/4-inch in 15 feet.
P. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
Q. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance.
R. Locate cleanouts at bases of stacks and leaders, changes in direction of more than 45 degrees on all horizontal runs, where required by Code and elsewhere as shown.
S. Extend cleanouts to finished wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
T. Install air gap type funnel drain for reduced pressure backflow preventer relief vent. Drain to exterior and provide backwater valve and insect screen.
U. Air admittance valves shall be located a minimum of four (4) inches above the weir of the fixture trap, installed in the vertical upright position and must be accessible for service, repair or replacement.
V. Install backflow preventers according to regulations in Public Water Supply Guide – Cross Connection Control Manual, latest issue per the New York State Department of Health.
W. Backflow preventers shall be tested by a New York State Certified Tester and a copy of “Report on the initial test of backflow prevention device” shall be furnished to the Owner and local water department.
PLUMBING – GENERAL 223000 - 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.3 TESTS
A. Tests and inspections shall comply with the Plumbing Code of New York State.
B. Above Grade and Interior Sanitary, Vent, Indirect Waste Piping: Seal openings; fill with water at minimum 10 feet of head and hold water level constant for two hours. Section test system so that maximum test pressure at any point in system does not exceed 40 psi. Locate test tees as required.
C. Above Grade Interior Domestic Water Piping: Hydrostatic test at 150 psi for two hours.
D. Above Grade Interior Propane Gas Piping: 15 psig air pressure for minimum one hour with no drop. Purge entire system subsequent to successful completion of testing. Make final test with soap solution.
E. Above Grade Interior Compressed Air Piping: Test at 175 psig air pressure. Hold for six hours with a maximum loss of 1/2 psi.
3.4 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B. Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/l residual.
D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets.
E. Maintain disinfectant in systems for 24 hours.
F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/l, repeat treatment.
G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/l.
H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601.
END OF SECTION 223000
PLUMBING – GENERAL 223000 - 9 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Water closets
B. Urinals
C. Lavatories
D. Sinks
E. Mop basin
F. Electric water coolers
G. Wash fountains
H. Emergency eyewash
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 22 0529 - Supports and Anchors
B. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing - General
C. Division 6 - Custom Casework: Preparation of counters for sinks.
D. Division 7 - Joint Sealers: Seal fixtures to walls and floors.
E. Division 10 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Lavatory tops.
F. Division 11 - Food Services Equipment
G. Division 11 - Laboratory Equipment
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI Standards
B. ARI Standards
C. ADA Standards
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data including fixtures, sizes, utility sizes, trim and finishes.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Five- year manufacturer's warranty of electric water cooler compressor.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Plumbing fixtures shall be Third-Party Tested.
B. Faucets shall conform to NSF Standard 61 (low lead).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER CLOSET (WC-1)
A. Bowl: ANSI A112.19.2; wall hung, siphon jet, vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch top spud, china bolt caps; Model 3351 001 manufactured by American Standard or equal.
B. Flush Valve: ANSI A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle, escutcheon, seat bumper, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker; maximum 1.6 gallon flush; Model 111-1.6 manufactured by Sloan or equal.
C. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts, without cover; Model 9500 SSCT manufactured by Church or equal.
D. Wall Mounted Carrier: ANSI A112.6.1; adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers; manufactured by Zurn or equal.
2.2 WATER CLOSET (WC-1)
A. Same as WC, except for handicapped use.
2.3 URINAL (UR)
A. Urinal: ANSI A112.19.2; vitreous china, wall hung siphon jet] urinal with shields, integral trap, removable stainless steel strainer, 3/4-inch top spud, steel supporting hanger; Model 6561 017 manufactured by American Standard or equal.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Flush Valve: ANSI A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop maximum 1-gallon flush; Model 186-1 manufactured by Sloan or equal.
C. Wall Mounted Carrier: ANSI A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment top and bottom support plates, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs; manufactured by Zurn or equal.
2.4 URINAL (UR-1)
A. Same as UR, except for handicapped use.
2.5 LAVATORY (LAV)
A. Basin: ANSI A112.19.2; vitreous china, oval under mount lavatory 17 x 14 inch, front overflow, mounting kit; Model 0495.221 manufactured by American Standard or equal.
B. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated supply fitting with open grid strainer, water economy aerator, indexed wrist blade handles, Model 8146 manufactured by Moen or equal. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon; chrome plated supplies, loose key stops, escutcheons; manufactured by Brasscraft or equal.
2.6 SINK (SK)
A. Bowl: ANSI A112.19.3; single compartment 19 x 18 x 7-1/2 inch outside dimensions, 18 gage thick, Type 304stainless steel, self-rimming with undercoating, 3-1/2-inch crumb cup and chromed brass drain, ledge back drilled for trim; Model LR1918 manufactured by Elkay or equal.
B. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with swing spout, water economy aerator, indexed lever handles; Model 8948 manufactured by Moen or equal. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon; chrome plated supplies, loose key stops, escutcheons; manufactured by McGuire or equal.
2.7 SINK (SK-1)
A. Bowl: ANSI A112.19.3; double compartment 29 x 18 x 6-1/2 inch outside dimensions 18 gage thick, Type 304 stainless steel, self-rimming with undercoating, 3-1/2-inch crumb cups, and chromed brass drain, ledge back drilled for trim; Model LRAD291865PD manufactured by Elkay or equal.
B. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with swing spout, water economy aerator, indexed lever handles; Model 8948 manufactured by Moen or equal. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon; chrome plated supplies, loose key stops, escutcheons; manufactured by McGuire or equal.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.8 FREE STANDING SINK (SK-2)
A. Floor mounted, molded stone, with baked enamel angle legs, 20 x 17 x 13 inches deep sink with an overall height from floor of 34-3/4 inches, deck type faucet: Model FL-1 with A-1 deck faucet manufactured by Fiat or equal.
2.9 LAB SINK (SK-3) – Faucet Only
A. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with serrated nozzle, vandal proof 4 inch wrist blade indexed handles; Model 786-E7CP manufactured by Chicago or equal. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon; chrome plated supplies, loose key stops, escutcheons; manufactured by McGuire or equal.
2.10 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER WITH BOTTLE FILLING STATION (EWC)
A. Stainless steel basin with integral drain, stainless steel bottle filler wrapper with ABS plastic alcove, chrome plated bubbler, 8 gph of 50-degree F at 90-degree F ambient, 115 volts, 3.8 full load amps, single phase, Model LVRCGRN8WSK manufactured by Elkay or equal.
B. Wall Mounted Carrier: ANSI A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs; manufactured by Zurn or equal.
2.11 WASH FOUNTAINS (WF)
A. Bowl: Semi-circular, 54-inch diameter, stainless steel. Model WF2704-o-STD-F-MMV-LSD manufactured by Bradley or equal.
B. Accessories: Foot controlled self-closing valve, spray head, liquid soap dispenser, manual mixing valve, supporting tube, spud and strainer, operating mechanism, foot levers and rail, combination stop, strainer and check valves.
2.12 MOP BASIN (MB)
A. Bowl: 24 x 24 x 10-inch high white molded stone, floor mounted, with one-inch-wide shoulders, stainless steel strainer; Model MSB-2424 manufactured by Fiat or equal.
B. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; exposed wall type supply with cross handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges; Model 830AA manufactured by Fiat or equal. 2.5 feet of 5/8-inch diameter plain end reinforced rubber hose, hose clamp, mop hanger; manufactured by Fiat or equal.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.13 EMERGENCY EYE AND FACE WASH (EW)
A. ANSI Z358.1; barrier free, wall-mounted, self-cleaning, no clogging eye and face wash with quick opening, stay open full-flow valves, yellow plastic eye and face wash receptor, twin eye wash heads and face spray ring, hand activation type 304 stainless steel push handle, wall bracket, P-trap, identification sign; Model S19224FWPT manufactured by Bradley or equal.
B. Thermostatic mixing valve for tempered water: Model S19-2000 manufactured by Bradley or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.
B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this Section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key angle stops, reducers, and escutcheons.
C. Install components level and plumb.
D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and wall carriers and bolts.
E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant, color to match fixture.
F. Repair leaky faucets and valves prior to final inspection.
G. Insulate water and drain pipes below handicapped lavatories and sinks.
H. Mount fixtures to the following heights above finished floor:
Water Closet:
Standard 15 inches to top of bowl rim Handicapped 18 inches to top of seat
Urinal:
Standard 24 inches to top of bowl rim Handicapped 17 inches to top of bowl rim
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
Lavatory:
Standard 31 inches to top of basin rim Handicapped 29 inches clear from floor to the bottom of apron
Electrical Water Cooler
Standard 40 inches to top of basin rim Handicapped 36 inches from the floor to the spout outlet.
Water Closet Flush Valves:
Standard 11 inches min. above bowl rim
Emergency Eye and Face Wash:
Standard 38 inches to receptor rim
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.
B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
C. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place.
3.4 FIXTURE ROUGH-IN SCHEDULE
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with following table of minimum sizes for particular fixtures. Hot Water Cold Water Waste Vent
Lavatory 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 1-1/2 inch 1-1/2 inch
Mop Basin 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 3 inch 1-1/2 inch
Sink 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 1-1/2 inch 1-1/2 inch
Water Cooler -- 1/2 inch 1-1/4 inch 1-1/4 inch
Water Closet --- 1 inch 4 inch 2 inch (Flush Valve)
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
Urinal --- 3/4 inch 2 inch 1-1/2 inch (Flush Valve)
Wash Fountain 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 2 inch 1-1/2 inch
Emergency Eyewash 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 1-1/4 inch ----
END OF SECTION 224000
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 7 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC 03/05
SECTION 260501 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Common electrical installation requirements.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, and cable trays will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260051 - 1 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC 03/05
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, or cable trays penetrate fire- rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
E. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
G. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
3.3 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
END OF SECTION 16051
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260051 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less. 3. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Cerro Wire LLC. 2. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 3. Okonite Company (The). 4. Southwire Company. 5. WESCO.
C. Standards:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8for stranded conductors.
E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.
2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC
A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an overall metallic sheath.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. 2. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 3. Okonite Company (The). 4. Southwire Company. 5. WESCO.
C. Standards:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. Comply with UL 1569. 3. RoHS compliant. 4. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
D. Circuits:
1. Single circuit 2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424.
E. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors.
F. Ground Conductor: Insulated.
G. Conductor Insulation:
1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.
H. Armor: Steel or Aluminum, interlocked.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. 3M Electrical Products. 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. ILSCO. 4. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
C. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.
D. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.
1. Material: Copper. 2. Type: One hole with standard barrels. 3. Termination: Compression.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger.
C. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway..
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inchesof slack.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
END OF SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:
1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Foundation steel electrodes.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1. Plans showing as-built, dimensioned locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: a. Ground rods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. ERICO International Corporation. 3. ILSCO. 4. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
2.4 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.
B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.
C. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.
D. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.
E. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron.
F. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.
G. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
H. Straps: Solid copper, cast-bronze clamp. Rated for 600 A.
I. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal two-piece clamp.
J. Water Pipe Clamps:
1. Mechanical type, two pieces with zinc-plated bolts.
a. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. b. Listed for direct burial.
2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector
2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE
A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.
3.3 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Pad-Mounted Transformers: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches from the foundation.
3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.
C. Water Heater: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
D. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Conduit and cable support devices. 3. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and hanger rods. 4. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support systems.
1. Hangers. Include product data for components. 2. Slotted support systems. 3. Equipment supports.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For hangers and supports for electrical systems.
1. Include design calculations and details of hangers.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design hanger and support system.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Flame Rating: Class 1. 2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.
2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
a. B-line, an Eaton business. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. d. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.
2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel. 4. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria, 5. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 4.
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
C. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) B-line, an Eaton business. 2) Hilti, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element. 4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
5. Toggle Bolts: Stainless-steel springhead type. 6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:
1. NECA 1. 2. NECA 101
B. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for EMT and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.
F. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. To Steel: [Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
END OF SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 3. Surface raceways. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Metal Conduit:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. b. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. c. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. e. Wheatland Tube Company.
2. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
4. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 5. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum. 6. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Metal Fittings: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following.
a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. b. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. c. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. e. Wheatland Tube Company.
2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 4. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 5. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel. b. Type: compression.
6. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
C. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 3. MonoSystems, Inc. 4. Square D.
B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 4. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 6. RACO; Hubbell. 7. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 8. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
E. Metal Floor Boxes:
1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.
G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminumwith gasketed cover.
I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.
J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
K. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
L. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 3. Underground Conduit: Refer to drawing details.. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250,Type 4.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. . 2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: GRC.
3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. EMT: Use steel compression fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.
B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment.
D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof.
E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
F. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.
G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communication or control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.
I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved.
J. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
K. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.
M. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.
N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
O. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
P. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
R. Surface Raceways:
1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.
S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.
T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. 4. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment. 5. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain different pressure set points. 6. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
U. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
V. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to bottom of box unless otherwise indicated.
W. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box.
X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.
Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.
BB. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
END OF SECTION 260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs. 2. Labels.
3. Tags. 4. Signs. 5. Cable ties. 6. Fasteners for labels and signs.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with ASME A13.1
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
D. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS
A. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service,feeder,and branch-circuit conductors.
1. Color shall be factory appliedor field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue.
3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow.
4. Color for Neutral: White. 5. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green..
B. Warning Label Colors:
1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
C. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
D. Equipment Identification Labels:
1. Black letters on a white field.
2.3 LABELS
A. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Write-on, 3-mil-thick, vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following:
a. Brady Corporation. b. Brother International Corporation. c. emedco. d. Ideal Industries, Inc. e. Panduit Corp.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. 3. Marker for Labels: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 4. Marker for Labels: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.4 TAPES AND STENCILS
A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Carlton Industries, LP. b. Champion America. c. HellermannTyton. d. Ideal Industries, Inc. e. Marking Services, Inc. f. Panduit Corp.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. emedco. d. Marking Services, Inc.
C. Tape and Stencil: 4-inch-wide black stripes on 10-inch centers placed diagonally over orange background and is 12 inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. HellermannTyton. b. LEM Products Inc. c. Marking Services, Inc. d. Seton Identification Products.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2.5 TAGS
A. Write-on Tags:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Carlton Industries, LP. b. LEM Products Inc. c. Seton Identification Products.
2. Polyester Tags: 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment. 3. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
2.6 SIGNS
A. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. emedco.
2. Engraved legend. 3. Thickness:
a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch thick. b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick. c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face d. Self-adhesive. e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
2.7 CABLE TIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. HellermannTyton. 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. Marking Services, Inc. 4. Panduit Corp.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, and self-locking.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual.
E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items.
G. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product.
H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.
I. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
J. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.
K. Accessible Fittings for Raceways: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "POWER." 2. LIGHTING 3. SIGNAL
L. Vinyl Wraparound Labels:
1. Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.
M. Snap-around Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
N. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
O. Self-Adhesive Labels:
1. On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1- 1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
P. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
1. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.
Q. Tape and Stencil: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.
R. Write-on Tags:
1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties.
S. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:
1. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on minimum 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use signs minimum 2 inches high.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
T. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below:
1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices.
B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.
C. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive labels containing the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "POWER." 2. "LIGHTING.".
D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl tape to identify the phase.
1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50- foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
E. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.
F. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide self-adhesive wraparound labels with the conductor designation.
G. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated.
H. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors.
I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive equipment labels
1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
J. Equipment Identification Labels:
1. Indoor Equipment: [Self-adhesive label,[Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign]. 2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
END OF SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Time switches. 2. Photoelectric switches. 3. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors. 4. Switchbox-mounted occupancy and vacancy sensors 5. 6. Lighting contactors.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers and manual light switches.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Show installation details for the following:
a. Occupancy sensors. b. Vacancy sensors.
2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and elevations, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TIME SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Intermatic, Inc. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. NSi Industries LLC.
B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Contact Configuration: SPST or DPST to suite application. 3. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac. 4. Programs: Two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays. 5. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program on selected channels. 6. Astronomic Time: All channels. 7. Automatic daylight savings time changeover. 8. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.
2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Intermatic, Inc. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. NSi Industries LLC.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A, and compatible with ballasts and LED lamps.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of the photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off. 3. Time Delay: Fifteen-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor. 5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure. 6. Failure Mode: Luminaire stays ON.
C. Description: Solid state; one set of NO dry contacts rated to operate connected load, complying with UL 773, and compatible with time switch.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range. 3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 4. Mounting: 1/2-inch threaded male conduit. 5. Failure Mode: Luminaire stays ON.
6. Power Pack: Digital controller capable of accepting three RJ45 inputs with one outputs rated for 20-A LED load at 120- and 277-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.
a. With integral current monitoring b. Compatible with digital addressable lighting interface. c. Plenum rated.
2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY SENSORS
1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 4. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 5. WattStopper; a Legrand® Group brand.
B. General Requirements for Sensors:
1. Ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors. 2. Dual technology.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3. Integrated or Separate power pack as required. 4. Hardwired connection to switch. 5. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 6. Operation: a. Combination Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, sensor shall be programmed to turn lights on when coverage area is occupied and turn them off when unoccupied, or to turn off lights that have been manually turned on; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
. 7. Power: Line voltage. 8. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. 9. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.
10. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor. 11. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 12. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected lighting level is present.
C. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of reflected ultrasonic energy.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.
D. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
4. Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180- degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 1000 square feet when mounted48 inches above finished floor.
2.4 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS
1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 4. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 5. Sensor Switch, Inc. 6. Square D. 7. WattStopper; a Legrand® Group brand.
B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor with manual on- off switch, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchboxusing hardwired connection.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Occupancy Sensor Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn lights off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 3. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 4. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA LED load at 120 V, 1200-VA LED load at 277 V.
C. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS1:
1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.. 2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic. 3. Switch Type: SP, field-selectable automatic "on," or manual "on," automatic "off." 4. Capable of controlling load in three-way application. 5. Voltage: Dual voltage - 120 and 277 V. 6. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc. The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor. 7. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes. 8. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching. 9. Color: White. 10. Faceplate: Color matched to switch.
2.5 DIGITAL TIMER LIGHT SWITCH
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Intermatic, Inc. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. NSi Industries LLC.
B. Description: Combination digital timer and conventional switch lighting control unit. Switchbox-mounted, backlit LCD display, with selectable time interval in 20 minute increments.
1. Rated 960 W at 120-V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120-V ac or 10 amps at 277-V ac for LED, and 1/4 horsepower at 120-V ac. 2. Integral relay for connection to BAS. 3. Voltage: Dual voltage - 120 and 277 V. 4. Color: White. 5. Faceplate: Color matched to switch.
2.6 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. 2. ASCO: a brand of Vertiv. 3. Eaton. 4. General Electric Company. 5. Square D.
B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination-type lighting contactors with nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less THD of normal load current). 2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation. 3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA type specified for the enclosure.
2.7 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.
D. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure- borne vibration unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 7 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations. 2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.
END OF SECTION 260923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 8 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
SECTION 260943 - DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Distributed Digital Lighting Control System: System includes
1. Emergency Lighting Control.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association.
B. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
C. FCC emission standards
D. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Listings
E. UL 2043 - Standard for Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products Installed in Air-Handling Spaces.
F. UL 20 - General Use Switches, Plug Load Controls
G. UL 924 - Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
H. ULC - Underwriter Laboratories of Canada Listings
1.3 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Digital Lighting Management System shall accommodate the square-footage coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors, switches, daylighting sensors and accessories that suit the required lighting and electrical system parameters.
B. System shall conform to requirements of IECC.
C. System shall comply with FCC emission standards specified in part 15, sub-part J for commercial and residential application.
D. System shall be listed under UL sections 916 and/or 508.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Catalog sheets and specifications. 2. Ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-1
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
4. Installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Wiring diagrams a for the various components of the System specified including: 1. Composite wiring and/or schematic diagram of each control circuit as proposed to be installed. 2. Show location of all devices, including at minimum sensors, load controllers, and switches/dimmers for each area on reflected ceiling plans. 3. Provide room/area details including products and sequence of operation for each room or area. Illustrate typical acceptable room/area connection topologies. 4. Network riser diagram including floor and building level details. Include network cable specification. Illustrate points of connection to integrated systems. Coordinate integration with mechanical and/or other trades.
D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Closeout Submittals: 1. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control devices. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manual: a. Include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data. b. Include Sequence of Operation, identifying operation for each room or space. c. Include manufacturer's maintenance information. d. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on device programming and setup. e. Include startup and test reports.
F. Title 24 Acceptance Testing Documentation: Submit Certification of Acceptance and associated documentation for lighting control acceptance testing performed in accordance with CAL TITLE 24 P6, as specified in Part 3 of this specification under "COMMISSIONING".
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing of centralized and distributed lighting control systems with a minimum of 10 years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company certified by the manufacturer and specializing in installation of networked lighting control products with minimum three years documented experience.
C. System Components: Demonstrate that individual components have undergone quality control and testing prior to shipping.
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to commencing Work of this section. Meeting to be attended by Contractor, Architect, system installer, factory authorized manufacturer's representative, and representative of all trades related to the system installation.
B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work and the following:
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-2
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
1. Confirm the location and mounting of all devices, with special attention to placement of switches, dimmers, and any sensors. 2. Review the specifications for low voltage control wiring and termination. 3. Discuss the functionality and configuration of all products, including sequences of operation, per design requirements. 4. Discuss requirements for integration with other trades
C. Inspect and make notes of job conditions prior to installation: 1. Record minutes of the conference and provide copies to all parties present. 2. Identify all outstanding issues in writing designating the responsible party for follow- up action and the timetable for completion. 3. Installation shall not begin until all outstanding issues are resolved to the satisfaction of the Architect.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
B. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment: 1. Ambient temperature: 32 to 104 degrees F (0 to 40 degrees C). 2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall provide a 5 year limited warranty on products within this installation, except where otherwise noted, and consisting of a one for one device replacement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper, which is located at: 2700 Zanker Rd., Suite 168; San Jose, CA 95134; Tel: 408.988.5331; Fax: 408.988.5373: Web:www.wattstopper.com
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Equipment Required: Lighting Control and Automation system as defined under this section covers the following equipment. 1. Digital Lighting Management (DLM) local network: Free topology, plug-in wiring system (Cat 5e) for power and data to room devices. 2. Digital Occupancy Sensors: Self-configuring, digitally addressable, calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-3
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
communications. 3. Digital Switches: Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton on/off, dimming, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications. 4. Handheld remotes for personal control: On/Off, dimming and scene remotes for control using infrared (IR) communications. Remote may be configured in the field to control selected loads or scenes without special tools. 5. Digital Daylighting Sensors: Single-zone closed loop, multi-zone open loop and single-zone dual-loop daylighting sensors with two-way active infrared (IR) communications for daylight harvesting using switching, bi-level, tri-level or dimming control. 6. Configuration Tools: Handheld remote for room configuration and relay panel programming provides two way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device / room from up to 30 feet away. 7. Digital Lighting Management (DLM) segment network: Linear topology, BACnet MS/TP network (1.5 twisted pair, shielded) to connect multiple DLM local networks for centralized control. 8. Emergency Lighting Control Unit (ELCU): Allows a standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building
B. Local Network LMRJ-Series: DLM local network is a free topology lighting control physical connection and communication protocol designed to control a small area of a building. 1. Features of the DLM local network include: a. Plug n' Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached. b. Simple replacement of any device in the local DLM network with a standard off the shelf unit without requiring significant commissioning, configuration or setup. c. Push n' Learn configuration to change the automatic configuration, including binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital devices in the local network. d. Two-way infrared communications for control by handheld remotes, and configuration by a handheld tool including adjusting load parameters, sensor configuration and binding, within a line of sight of up to 30 feet from a sensor, wall switch or IR receiver. 2. Digital room devices connect to the local network using pre-terminated Cat 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors, which provide both data and power to room devices. Systems that utilize RJ-45 patch cords but do not provide serial communication data from individual end devices are not acceptable. 3. If manufacturer's pre-terminated Cat5e cables are not used for the installation each cable must be individually tested and observed by authorized service representative following installation.
2.3 DIGITAL LOAD CONTROLLERS (ROOM, PLUG LOAD AND FIXTURE CONTROLLERS)
A. Digital Load Controllers: Digital controllers for lighting zones, fixtures and/or plug loads automatically bind room loads to the connected control devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Provide controllers to match the room lighting and DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-4
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
plug load control requirements. Controllers are simple to install, and do not have dip switches/potentiometers, or require special configuration for standard Plug n' Go applications. Control units include the following features 1. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room. 2. Simple replacement using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf device. 3. Multiple room controllers connected together in a local network must automatically arbitrate with each other, without requiring any configuration or setup, so that individual load numbers are assigned starting with load 1 to a maximum of 64, assigned based on each controller's device ID's from highest to lowest. 4. Device Status LEDs to indicate: a. Data transmission b. Device has power c. Status for each load d. Configuration status 5. Quick installation features including: a. Standard junction box mounting b. Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable 6. Based on individual configuration, each load shall be capable of the following behavior on power up following the loss of normal power: a. Turn on to 100 percent b. Turn off c. Turn on to last level 7. Each load be configurable to operate in the following sequences based on occupancy: a. Auto-on/Auto-off (Follow on and off) b. Manual-on/Auto-off (Follow off only) 8. Polarity of each load output shall be reversible, via digital configuration, so that on is off and off is on. 9. BACnet object information shall be available for the following objects: a. Load status b. Schedule state, normal or after-hours c. Demand Response enable and disable d. Room occupancy status e. Total room lighting and plug loads watts f. Electrical current g. Total watts per controller h. Total room watts/sq ft. i. Force on/off all loads 10. UL 2043 plenum rated 11. Manual override and LED indication for each load 12. Zero cross circuitry for each load 13. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual room controller or plug load controller shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the controller itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years. 14. Dimming Room Controllers shall share the following features: a. Each load shall have an independently configurable preset on level for Normal Hours and After Hours events to allow different dimmed levels to be established at the start of both Normal Hours and After Hours events. b. Fade rates for dimming loads shall be specific to bound switch buttons, and the DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-5
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
load shall maintain a default value for any bound buttons that do not specify a unique value. c. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool: 1) Establish preset level for each load from 0-100 percent 2) Set high and low trim for each load 3) Initiate lamp burn in for each load of either 0, 12 or 100 hours d. Override button for each load provides the following functions: 1) Press and release for on/off control 2) Press and hold for dimming control e. Each dimming output channel shall have an independently configurable minimum and maximum calibration trim level to set the dimming range to match the true dynamic range of the connected ballast or driver. LED level indicators on bound dimming switches shall utilize this new maximum and minimum trim. f. Each dimming output channel shall have an independently configurable minimum and maximum trim level to set the dynamic range of the output within the new 0-100 percent dimming range defined by the minimum and maximum calibration trim. g. Calibration and trim levels must be set per output channel. Devices that set calibration or trim levels per controller (as opposed to per load) are not acceptable. h. All configuration shall be digital. Devices that set calibration or trim levels per output channel via trim pots or dip-switches are not acceptable.
2.4 DIGITAL CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR
A. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following: 1. Digital calibration and pushbutton configuration for the following variables: a. Sensitivity, 0-100 percent in 10 percent increments b. Time delay, 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments c. Test mode, Five second time delay d. Detection technology, PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or re- activation. e. Walk-through mode 2. Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network. 3. Programmable control functionality including: a. Each sensor may be programmed to control specific loads within a local network. b. Sensor shall be capable of activating one of 16 user-definable lighting scenes. c. Adjustable retrigger time period for manual-on loads. Load will retrigger (turn on) automatically within a configurable period of time (default 10 seconds) after turning off. d. On dual technology sensors, independently configurable trigger modes are available for both Normal (NH) and After Hours (AH) time periods. The retrigger mode can be programmed to use the following technologies: e. Ultrasonic and Passive Infrared f. Ultrasonic or Passive Infrared
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-6
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
g. Ultrasonic only h. Passive Infrared only i. Independently configurable sensitivity settings for passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies (on dual technology sensors) for both Normal (NH) and After Hour (AH) time periods. 4. One or two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network. 5. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls. 6. Device Status LEDs, which may be disabled for selected applications, including: a. PIR detection b. Ultrasonic detection c. Configuration mode d. Load binding 7. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools. 8. Manual override of controlled loads. 9. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual occupancy sensor shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the sensor itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.
B. BACnet object information shall be available for the following objects: 1. Detection state 2. Occupancy sensor time delay 3. Occupancy sensor sensitivity, PIR and Ultrasonic
C. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings
D. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.
E. WattStopper product numbers: LMPX, LMDX, LMPC, LMUC, LMDC
2.5 DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES
A. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configuration. Wall switches shall include the following features: 1. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls. 2. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons and/or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall. 3. Configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission. 4. Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics: a. Bi-level LED b. Dim locator level indicates power to switch c. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active d. Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps. 5. Programmable control functionality including: a. Button priority may be configured to any BACnet priority level, from 1-16, corresponding to networked operation allowing local actions to utilize life
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-7
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
safety priority b. Scene patterns may be saved to any button other than dimming rockers. Once set, buttons may be digitally locked to prevent overwriting of the preset levels. 6. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual wall switch shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the wall switch itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.
B. BACnet object information shall be available for the following objects: 1. Button state 2. Switch lock control 3. Switch lock status
C. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.
D. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration shall be required to achieve multi-way switching.
E. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons from Load to Scene, and vice versa. 1. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only. 2. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change. 3. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours. 4. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch. 5. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on any load controller or relay panel and are not load type dependent; each button may be bound to multiple loads. 6. WattStopper product numbers: LMSW-101, LMSW-102, LMSW-103, LMSW-104, LMSW-105, LMSW-108, LMDM-101. Available in white, light almond, ivory, grey, red and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening.
2.6 DLM HANDHELD USER INTERFACE REMOTES
A. Battery-operated handheld devices in 1, 2 and 5 button configurations for remote switching or dimming control. Remote controls shall include the following features: 1. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for line of sight communication with DLM local network within up to 30 feet. 2. LED on each button confirms button press. 3. Load buttons may be bound to any load on a load controller or relay panel and are not load type dependent; each button may be bound to multiple loads. 4. Inactivity timeout to save battery life.
B. Provide with a wall mount holster and mounting hardware for each remote.
C. WattStopper part numbers: LMRH-101, LMRH-102, LMRH-105.
2.7 LMDI-100 SERIAL DATA INTERFACE
A. Connects a Digital Lighting Management (DLM) local network to a third party system for coordinated control of devices including lighting controls, AV equipment, shade controls and user interfaces by either system.
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-8
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
B. Operation The LMDI-100 operates on power from the DLM local network and can transmit and receive industry standard RS-232 signals. A built-in protocol allows automatic response to message requests from third party devices. Message options include queries, such as load status, occupancy sensor status, power reading and other parameter data. Other messages can command scene recall or load operation.
C. A/V Interface Operation The LMDI-100 allows an A/V system to control a DLM local network as a slave device. The A/V system can be added to the installation at any time, and is not required for implementation of code-compliant lighting control sequences of operation using Plug n’ Go™ or Push n’ Learn™.
D. Applications The serial data interface is for use in conference rooms, training centers, auditoriums or theaters where specialized loads or equipment must be controlled by third party devices. Examples include applications with projectors, mechanical shade control systems and theatrical lighting.
E. SERIAL DATA INTERFACE LMDI-100 INTERFACES & ACCESSORIES - RS- 232 communication at 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 baud; default is 19200 • Integral message protocol eliminates the need for interface configuration • Status LEDs for transmit and receive allow simple verification of connectivity • UL 2043 plenum rated • The product meets the materials restrictions of RoHS • BAA/TAA-compliant models available
2.8 HANDHELD CONFIGURATION TOOLS
A. Provide a wireless configuration tool to facilitate customization of DLM local networks using two-way infrared communications, and/or PC software that connects to each local network via a USB interface.
B. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include but not be limited to: 1. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range of approximately 30 feet. 2. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu- driven operation. 3. Must be able to read and modify parameters for load controllers and relay panels, occupancy sensors, wall switches, daylighting sensors, network bridges, and identify DLM devices by type and serial number. 4. Save up to eight occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors. 5. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting. Set room mode for testing of Normal Hours (NH) and After Hours (AH) parameter settings. 6. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during auto-configuration, and input light level data to complete configuration of open loop daylighting controls. 7. Set room mode for testing of Normal Hours (NH) and After Hours (AH) parameter settings. 8. Verify status of building level network devices.
C. WattStopper Product Numbers: Handheld LMCT-100
2.9 NETWORK BRIDGE DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-9
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
A. Network bridge module connects a DLM local network to a BACnet-compliant segment network for communication between rooms, relay panels and a segment manager or BAS. Each local network shall include a network bridge component to provide a connection to the local network room devices. Network bridge shall use industry standard BACnet MS/TP network communication and an optically isolated EIA/TIA RS-485 transceiver. 1. Network bridge shall be provided as a separate module connected on the local network through an available RJ-45 port. 2. Provide Plug n' Go operation to automatically discover room devices connected to the local network and make all device parameters visible to the segment manager via the segment network. No commissioning shall be required for set up of the network bridge on the local network. 3. Network bridge shall automatically create standard BACnet objects for selected DLM devices to allow any BACnet-compliant BAS to include lighting control and power monitoring features as provided by the DLM devices on each local network. BACnet objects will be created for the addition or replacement of any given DLM device for the installed life of the system. Products requiring that an application-specific point database be loaded to create or map BACnet objects are not acceptable. Systems not capable of providing BACnet data for control devices via a dedicated BACnet Device ID and physical MS/TP termination per room are not acceptable. Standard BACnet objects shall be provided as follows: a. Read/write the normal or after hours schedule state for the room b. Read the detection state of each occupancy sensor c. Read the aggregate occupancy state of the room d. Read/write the On/Off state of loads e. Read/write the dimmed light level of loads f. Read the button states of switches g. Read total current in amps, and total power in watts through the load controller h. Read/write occupancy sensor time delay, PIR sensitivity and ultrasonic sensitivity settings i. Activate a preset scene for the room j. Read/write daylight sensor fade time and day and night setpoints k. Read the current light level, in foot-candles, from interior and exterior photosensors and photocells l. Set daylight sensor operating mode m. Read/write wall switch lock status n. Read watts per square foot for the entire controlled room o. Write maximum light level per load for demand response mode p. Read/write activation of demand response mode for the room q. Activate/restore demand response mode for the room
B. WattStopper product numbers: LMBC-300
2.10 PROGRAMMING, CONFIGURATION AND DOCUMENTATION SOFTWARE
A. PC-native application for optional programming of detailed technician-level parameter information for all DLM products, including all parameters not accessible via BACnet and the handled IR configuration tool. Software must be capable of accessing room-level parameter information locally within the room when connected via the optional LMCI-100 USB programming adapter, or globally for many segment networks simultaneously utilizing standard BACnet/IP communication.
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-10
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
B. Additional parameters exposed through this method include but are not limited to: 1. Occupancy sensor detection LED disable for performance and other aesthetic spaces where blinking LEDs present a distraction. 2. Six occupancy sensor action behaviors for each controlled load, separately configurable for normal hours and after hours modes. Modes include: No Action, Follow Off Only, Follow On Only, Follow On and Off, Follow On Only with Override Time Delay, Follow Off Only with Blink Warn Grace Time, Follow On and Off with Blink Warn Grace Time. 3. Separate fade time adjustments per load for both normal and after hours from 0 - 4 hours. 4. Configurable occupancy sensor re-trigger grace period from 0 - 4 minutes separate for both normal hours and after hours. 5. Separate normal hours and after hours per-load button mode with modes including: Do nothing, on only, off only, on and off. 6. Load control polarity reversal so that on events turn loads off and vice versa. 7. Per-load DR (demand response) shed level in units of percent. 8. Load output pulse mode in increments of 1second. 9. Fade trip point for each load for normal hours and after hours that establishes the dimmer command level at which a switched load closes its relay to allow for staggered On of switched loads in response to a dimmer.
C. Generation of reports at the whole file, partial file, or room level. Reports include but are not limited to: 1. Device list report: All devices in a project listed by type. 2. Load binding report: All load controller bindings showing interaction with sensors, switches, and daylighting. 3. BACnet points report: Per room Device ID report of the valid BACnet points for a given site's BOM. 4. Room summary report: Device manifest for each room, aggregated by common BOM, showing basic sequence of operations. 5. Device parameter report: Per-room lists of all configured parameters accessible via hand held IR programmer for use with O&M documentation. 6. Scene report: All project scene pattern values not left at defaults (i.e. 1 = all loads 100 percent, 2 = all loads 75 percent, 3 = all loads 50 percent, 4 = all loads 25 percent, 5- 16 = same as scene 1). 7. Occupancy sensor report: Basic settings including time delay and sensitivities for all occupancy sensors.
D. Network-wide programming of parameter data in a spreadsheet-like programming environment including but not limited to the following operations: 1. Set, copy/paste an entire project site of sensor time delays. 2. Set, copy/paste an entire project site of sensor sensitivity settings. 3. Search based on room name and text labels. 4. Filter by product type (i.e. LMRC-212) to allow parameter set by product. 5. Filter by parameter value to search for product with specific configurations.
E. Network-wide firmware upgrading remotely via the BACnet/IP network. 1. Mass firmware update of entire rooms. 2. Mass firmware update of specifically selected rooms or areas. 3. Mass firmware upgrade of specific products
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-11
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
F. WattStopper Product Number: LMCS-100, LMCI-100
2.11 EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
A. Emergency Lighting Control Unit - A UL 924 listed device that monitors a switched circuit providing normal lighting to an area. The unit provides normal ON/OFF control of emergency lighting along with the normal lighting. Upon normal power failure the emergency lighting circuit will close, forcing the emergency lighting ON until normal power is restored. Features include: 1. 120/277 volts, 50/60 Hz, 20 amp ballast rating 2. Push to test button 3. Auxiliary contact for remote test or fire alarm system interface
B. WattStopper Product Numbers: ELCU-100, ELCU-200.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Do not begin installation until measurements have been verified and work areas have been properly prepared.
B. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C. Verify that required pre-installation meeting specified in Part 1 of this specification has been completed, recorded meeting minutes have been distributed and all outstanding issues noted have been resolved prior to the start of installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with the approved system shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install all room/area devices using manufacturer's factory-tested Cat 5e cable with pre- terminated RJ-45 connectors. 1. If pre-terminated cable is not used for room/area wiring, each field-terminated cable shall be tested following installation and testing results submitted to the Manufacturer's Representative for approval prior to proceeding with the Work. 2. If fixtures have internal DLM Control Modules, ensure that they are also connected with Cat 5e cable. 3. Install all room to room network devices using manufacturer-supplied LM-MSTP network wire or wireless devices. Network wire substitution is not permitted and may result in loss of product warranty. 4. Low voltage wiring topology must comply with manufacturer's specifications. 5. Route network wiring as indicated on the Drawings as closely as possible. Document final wiring location, routing and topology on as built drawings.
C. All line voltage connections shall be tagged to indicate circuit and switched legs.
D. Test all devices to ensure proper communication.
E. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-12
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
and energy savings. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted while occupied.
F. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the configuration of the system including room by room description including: 1. Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting setpoints. 2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.) 3. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.)
G. Post start-up tuning - Adjust sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the Owner's requirements 30 days from beneficial occupancy. Provide a detailed report to the Architect / Owner of post start-up activity.
H. Tighten all panel Class I conductors from both circuit breaker and to loads to torque ratings as marked on enclosure UL label.
I. All Class II cabling shall enter enclosures from within low-voltage wiring areas and shall remain within those areas. No Class I conductors shall enter a low-voltage area.
J. Run separate neutrals for any phase dimmed branch load circuit. Different types of dimming loads shall have separate neutral.
K. Verify all non-panel-based lighting loads to be free from short circuits prior to connection to room controllers.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Notify Architect and Manufacturer in writing a minimum of 3 weeks prior to system start-up and testing.
B. Tests and Inspections: Manufacturer's service representative shall perform the following inspections and prepare reports. 1. Verify Class I and II wiring connections are terminated properly by validating system performance. 2. Set IP addresses and other network settings of system front end hardware per facilities IT instructions. 3. Verify / complete task programming for all switches, dimmers, time clocks, and sensors. 4. Verify that the control of each space complies with the Sequence of Operation. 5. Correct any system issues and retest..
C. Provide a report in table format with drawings, or using a software file that can be opened in the manufacturer's system software including each room or space that has lighting control installed. Indicate the following: 1. Date of test or inspection. 2. Loads per space, or Fixture Address identification. 3. Quantity and Type of each device installed 4. Reports providing each device's settings.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-13
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College
Educational Center Project
A. Before Substantial Completion, arrange and provide a one-day Owner instruction period to designated Owner personnel. Set-up, starting of the lighting control system and Owner instruction includes: 1. Confirmation of entire system operation and communication to each device. 2. Confirmation of operation of individual relays, switches, and sensors. 3. Confirmation of system Programming, photocell settings, override settings, etc. 4. Provide training to cover installation, programming, operation, and troubleshooting of the lighting control system.
3.5 PRODUCT SUPPORT AND SERVICE
A. Factory telephone support shall be available at no cost to the Owner following acceptance. Factory assistance shall consist of assistance in solving application issues pertaining to the control equipment.
END OF SECTION 260943
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 260943-14
Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 262213 - LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes distribution, dry-type transformers with a nominal primary and secondary rating of 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Source quality-control reports.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division. 4. Sola/Hevi-Duty; a brand of Emerson Electric Co. 5. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1. Comply with 10 CFR 431 (DOE 2016) efficiency levels. 2. Marked as compliant with DOE 2016 efficiency levels by an NRTL.
D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.
E. Coils: Continuous windings except for taps.
1. Coil Material: Aluminum. 2. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 3. Terminal Connections: Bolted.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Cores: One leg per phase.
C. Enclosure: Ventilated.
1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal out moisture and air. 2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only. 3. Wiring Compartment: Sized for conduit entry and wiring installation.
LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
D. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.
E. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
F. Grounding: Provide ground-bar kit or a ground bar installed on the inside of the transformer enclosure.
G. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates: Self-adhesive label for each distribution transformer. Self-adhesive labels are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.
1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.
B. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening supports. Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface.
C. Construct concrete bases according to Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"" and anchor floor-mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.
D. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce noise generation.
F. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections:
B. Small (Up to 167-kVA Single-Phase or 500-kVA Three-Phase) Dry-Type Transformer Field Tests:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection.
a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. c. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been removed. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by manufacturer. f. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified. g. Verify the presence of surge arresters and that their ratings are as specified.
2. Electrical Tests: a. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral, after energization and prior to loading.
C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.5 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
END OF SECTION 262213
LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
B. SPD: Surge protective device.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection, knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Enclosures: Flush and Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Height: 84 inches maximum. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.
E. Incoming Mains Location: Top or Bottom as required per site conditions and as indicated on drawings..
F. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
G. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in the panelboard. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar for each pole in the panelboard.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
H. NRTL Label: Panelboards shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.Refer to drawings for metering requirements..
I. Future Devices: Panelboards shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
J. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting capacity.
K.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Company; GE Energy Management - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division. 4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D. Mains: Circuit Breakers or Main Lug Only as shown on drawings.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Company; GE Energy Management - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division. 4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Company; GE Energy Management - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division. 4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
B. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:
a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads. b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:
a. RMS sensing. b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip. c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays. d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data. e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and magnitude of fault that caused the trip. f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer. g. Field-Adjustable Settings:
1) Instantaneous trip. 2) Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3) Long and short time adjustments. 4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
6. MCCB Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status. c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load ratings. d. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. e. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and HID lighting circuits. f. Shunt Trip: 24-Vtrip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage. g. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.
B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC rating.
C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
C. Mount top of trim 90 inches finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
E. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
G. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes system..,
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
I. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
J. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.
END OF SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 2. USB receptacles. 3. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 4. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 5. 6. Wall-box dimmers. 7. Wall plates.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: Upon request for architect, provide one for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. RoHS compliant.
D. Comply with NEMA WD 1.
E. Device Color:
1. Wiring Devices System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
2. SPD Devices: Blue.
F. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
G. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 STANDARD-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A
A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A :
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products by one of the following:
a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596.
B. Weather-Resistant Duplex Receptacle, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations" Article.
2.3 COMBINATION 20A AND USB RECEPTACLES
A. 20A Power and USB Charging Receptacles :
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
2. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel- plated, brass mounting strap. 3. USB Receptacles: Dual, USB Type A, 5 V dc, and 2.1 A per receptacle (minimum). 4. Duplex 5-20R receptacle. See Standard Duplex Receptacle 125V, 20A article. 5. Standards: Comply with UL 1310 and USB 3.0 devices.
2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A
A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Type: Feed through. 5. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A
A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
B. Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Eaton (Arrow Hart).
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
C. Four-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
2.6 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Refer to specification section 260923 Lighting Control Devices
2.7 DIMMERS
A. Wall-Box Dimmers:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.. d. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
2. Description: Modular, full-wave, solid-state dimmer switch with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. 3. Control: Continuously adjustable slider with separate “on/off” control (not slide to “off”); with single-pole or three-way switching. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 1472. 5. LED Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with LED lamps; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 5 percent of full brightness.
2.8 WALL PLATES
A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices.
B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel
C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof, While-in-Use Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, thermoplastic] with lockable cover.
2.9 CORD REELS
A. Durable, corrosion resistant steel construction with yellow powder coat finish.
1. Multi-position guide arm. 2. Positive-latch mechanism automatically maintains desired cord length. 3. 12 AWG conductors. 4. 5 ft. plug-in supply power cord, 45 ft. SJ cable reel. 5. NEMA 5-20R GFCI duplex outlet. 6. Ceiling mounted. 7. Manufactured by Hubbell or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 2. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 3. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Device Installation:
1. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 2. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
D. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
E. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
F. Dimmers:
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan-speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device, listing conditions in the written instructions.
G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 262813 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:
a. Control circuits. b. Enclosed controllers. c. Enclosed switches.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Bussmann, an Eaton business. 2. Littelfuse, Inc. 3. Mersen USA.
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.
1. Type RK-1: 250 and 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 2. Type RK-5: 250 and600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 3. Type J: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 4. Type L: 600-V, 601- to 6000-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.
FUSES 262813 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.
1. Branch Circuits and feeders up to 600A: Class RK-1 Bussmann Lowpeak.
2. Motors and Transformers: Class RK-5 Bussmann Fusetron.
3. Main Service and Feeders above 600A: Class J or L.
B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s) in location shown on the Drawings or as indicated in the field by Construction Manager. Provide 3 spare fuses for each type and size of fuses installed.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.
END OF SECTION 262813
FUSES 262813 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Enclosures.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, accessory, and component indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control reports.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division. 4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty:
1. Single throw. 2. Quantity of poles to suite application. 3. 240 and 600-V ac. 4. 200 A and smaller. 5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses. 6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
6. Lugs: Mechanicaltype, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division. 4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
B. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be finished with gray baked enamel paint, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized steel (NEMA 250 Type 1) and gray baked enamel paint, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized galvannealed steel (NEMA 250 Types 3R.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than five working days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
3.3 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the following environmental ratings.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Install individual wall-mounted switches with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D. Install fuses in fusible devices.
E. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
B. Tests and Inspections for Switches:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. c. Verify that the unit is clean. d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation. e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings. f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity. g. Verify correct phase barrier installation. h. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding surfaces.
C. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 264313 - SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes field-mounted SPDs for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and control equipment.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Copy of UL Category Code VZCA certification, as a minimum, listing the tested values for VPRs, Inominal ratings, MCOVs, type designations, OCPD requirements, model numbers, system voltages, and modes of protection.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace or replace SPDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 264313 - 1 CIRCUITS Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS
A. SPD with Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with UL 1449.
D. MCOV of the SPD shall be the nominal system voltage.
2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSOR
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products by one of the following:
1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division. 4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
B. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 2.
1. SPDs with the following features and accessories: a. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor components. b. Indicator light display for protection status.
C. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 240kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V , three-phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:
1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V. 3. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V.
E. SCCR: Equal or exceed 100 kA.
F. Inominal Rating: 20 kA.
2.3 PANEL SUPPRESSORS
SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 264313 - 2 CIRCUITS Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division. 4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
B. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 2.
1. Include LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 2. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor components.
C. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 100 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:
1. Line to Neutral: 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 2. Line to Ground: 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 4. Line to Line: 1200 V for 208Y/120 V
E. SCCR: Equal or exceed 100 kA.
F. Inominal Rating: 20 kA.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install an OCPD or disconnect as required to comply with the UL listing of the SPD.
C. Install SPDs with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible, and adjust circuit-breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest leads. Do not splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.
D. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.
SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 264313 - 3 CIRCUITS Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
E. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation requirements.
B. An SPD will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate and maintain SPDs.
END OF SECTION 264313
SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 264313 - 4 CIRCUITS Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes interior LED luminaires:
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Samples: Provide sample fixtures when requested by architect.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.
B. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Ambient Temperature: 41 to 104 deg F.
B. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet.
2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles.
1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics: a. CCT and CRI.
C. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.
D. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.
E. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
F. California Title 24 compliant.
2.3 LUMINAIRES
A. Refer to Luminaire Schedule on drawings for fixture description.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts:
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
B. Steel:
1. ASTM A 36/A 36M for carbon structural steel. 2. ASTM A 568/A 568M for sheet steel.
C. Stainless Steel:
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. 1. Manufacturer's standard grade. 2. 2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A 240/240 M.
D. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M.
E. Aluminum: ASTM B 209.
2.5 METAL FINISHES
A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece.
2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire.
C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.
D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
C. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
D. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 265119
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 265213 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Emergency lighting units. 2. Exit signs.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with integral or remote emergency battery powered supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.
D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.
E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit and exit sign, arranged by designation.
B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265213 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
C. Sample Warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to comply with UL 924.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.
E. Comply with UL 1598 for recessed luminaires.
F. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within luminaire body.
1. Emergency Connection: Operate one LED lightbar continuously upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265213 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
3. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space.
a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. Push-to-test button maybe remote mounted in accessible location if fixture will not accommodate the button. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay. 6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code- required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.
G. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more lamps, remote mounted from luminaire.
1. Emergency Connection: Operate one LED lightbar continuously. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire. 2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. 5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure listed for installation inside, on top of, or remote from luminaire. Remote assembly shall be located no less than half the distance recommended by the emergency power unit manufacturer, whichever is less. 6. Test Push Button: Remote or integral push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code- required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.
2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units.
B. Emergency Luminaires:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Cooper Lighting, an Eaton business.
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265213 - 3 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
b. GE Lighting Solutions. c. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
2. Emergency Luminaires: As indicated on Drawing Luminaire Schedule, with the following additional features:
a. Operating at nominal voltage of Dual Voltage (120-277V). b. Internal emergency power unit. c. Rated for installation in damp locations, and for sealed and gasketed fixtures in wet locations.
C. Emergency Lighting Unit:
a. Cooper Lighting, an Eaton business. b. Dual-Lite. c. Evenlite, Inc. d. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
2. Emergency Lighting Unit: As indicated on Drawing Luminaire Schedule
3. Dual Voltage Rate (120-277V). 4. Wall with universal junction box adaptor. 5. UV stable thermoplastic housing. 6. Two LED lamp heads. 7. Internal emergency power unit.
2.3 EXIT SIGNS
A. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Cooper Lighting, an Eaton business. b. Evenlite, Inc. c. Hubbell Industrial Lighting; Hubbell Incorporated. d. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
2. Dual voltage rated (120-277V) 3. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 4. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Internal emergency power unit.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts:
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265213 - 4 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access:
1. Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions. 2. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally when secured in operating position.
C. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Clear, UV-stabilized acrylic. 2. Acrylic: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3.
D. Housings:
1. Refer to Luminaire Schedule on drawings.
2.5 METAL FINISHES
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
C. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire and emergency power unit weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit. 3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265213 - 5 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent of fixture weight.
D. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Attached to structural members in walls. 2. Do not attach fixtures directly to gypsum board.
E. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of fixture oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. 2. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.
F. Ceiling Grid Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secure to outlet box. 2. Secure emergency power unit using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of emergency power unit.
G. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 265213
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265213 - 6 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
SECTION 265619 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp technology. 2. Luminaire supports.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color rendering index.
C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."
D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating
E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale and coordinated.
A. Sample warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1. Provide a list of luminaire characteristics for each fixture type.
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 1 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Mark locations of exterior luminaires for approval by construction manager prior to the start of light pole foundation installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location.
C. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K.
D. L70 lamp life of 50,000 hours.
E. Nominal Operating Voltage: Refer to Luminaire Schedule on drawings.
F. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires for each fixture type from single source from a single manufacturer.
2.2 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Refer to Luminaire Schedule on drawings.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating and free of light leakage under operating conditions. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during servicing and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning.
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 2 Lewis County – Jefferson Community College Educational Center Project
D. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
E. Housings:
1. Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in use.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in finishes are unacceptable.
B. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Fasten luminaire to structural support.
C. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning. 3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
D. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Attached to structural members in walls.
E. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways.
F. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square.
G. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.
END OF SECTION 265619
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 3